Home

User Manual

Contents

1. Internal Network pE gt ethi 4 HANI 2 3 2 A 14 Network card 1 eth0 Network card 2 eth1 Network card 3 eth2 As in the diagram on the left the security system should be the only link between the internal and external networks Installation Address Table i neal IP Address Network Mask Default Gateway Internal network interface External network interface DMZ network interface Network interface for the HA The third and further network cards are optional 2 Network interface for the High Availability system 15 Installation 2 2 Installation Instructions What follows is a step by step guide to the installation process The installation process will destroy all existing data on the hard disc Attention Preparation Before installation please make sure you have the following items ready the security system CD ROM the license key for the security system the address table with all IP addresses network masks and default gateway filled in 2 2 1 Software Installation The first part of the installation uses the Installation Menu to con figure basic settings The setup program will check the hardware of the system and then install the necessary software on your PC 1 16 Boot your PC from the CD ROM Drive Select the appropriate installation mode for your computer Three pre compiled kernel options are available for t
2. OR Bai service they provide in terms of bandwidth si P gt gt measured in kBit s If a server tries to cross the saturation boundary if it tries to send Web server u more information than the link can carry the ps sepa communication can either slow to a crawl or be gt 100 MBit s le dropped altogether vari The graphic at left for example shows a gt 100MBit s_ network with a web server and an FTP server FTP Server Firewall Both servers share a 2Mbit uplink to the Internet Due to the protocols TCP based applications e g FTP always use the full bandwidth It might thus happen that not enough bandwidth is available for the Web Server The Quality of Service QoS function allows you to assign different priorities to the connections if the Uplink is overloaded These priorities are defined in the packet filter rules through the Allow Allow high priority and Allow low priority actions Important Note In order to enable the priorities high priority and low priority you Must select the respective interface for the QoS function in the Network Interfaces menu and also define the values Uplink Bandwidth kbits and Downlink Bandwidth kbits 207 Using the Security System In order to assign the same bandwidth to the connection with the web server as shown in the example as the one for the connection with the FTP server both packet filter rules must be set to the same Ac
3. Clicking the download icon will allow you to download this Log File to your local client computer You can then use these Log Files to import data into another program for example Microsoft Excel 337 Using the Security System The Log File Sub Tab All protocols Logs of a group are listed in this sub tab The sub group can be opened in the overview by clicking on the folder icon P Browse local Log Files j Total 55 entries 35 filtered 20 shown 7 Filters 7 Name Activity DNS proxy HTTP proxy Intrusion Protection System Browse local Log Files Total 55 entries 52 filtered 3 shown Filters 7 Name File Count Name Activity 5ize r HTP proxy BD 2 files ke amp mj HTTP proxy Friday February 11 2005 Y fvar log squid log Live log 10095 amp m a HTTP proxy Thursday February 10 2005 squid 2005 02 10 log ez 1854 amp Dit Nagler Please select 3 The following additional functions are available in the sub tab Date For older protocols listed in the sub tab the date and time will be displayed B Return to the overview by clicking on the folder icon 7 This is today s protocol Clicking on the icon opens the Live Log window B This in an archived protocol Clicking on the symbol opens the Log window File Count Name In the protocol from today the path to the log file and the Live Log message will be displayed in this column In this column the file names will be displa
4. New e mail addresses are taken over to the ordered list by the entry field by clicking on the Add button Ordered Lists are described in chapter on page 34 321 Using the Security System Current Report Current Report Clicking on the Show button opens a window in which the current complete report is displayed This TT EE report can be printed out by a oi o TE TE clicking on the Print this UpZDate System veccess talied coe aren ero owes Report button Contig changes total ACM uplonds total Ue HA takeover total Uplink allewer events total License wsage Daily Graph License usage Det ty The Accounting function monitors all IP packets transmitted over the various network cards and once a day summarizes their size Statistics for the preceding month are also generated at the beginning of each new month These statistics are then used to generate a report This report is useful for instance when an organization pays its service provider based on the volume of data transmitted Accounting is configured and enabled in the Network Accounting menu Further information is available in chapter on page 186 Browse Accounting Reports The existing accounting protocols will be displayed in this window Select the month from the Select Report drop down menu The report will appear in the window below Use the Local Logs Browse menu to download
5. User Displays which user is currently logged in to WebAdmin as well as the client the user is logged in from Last Login Displays when and from which client WebAdmin was last used 3 2 Tab List Thu Feb 10 2005 19 21 36 System Internal Address Definitions Network Intrusion Protection Internal Broadcast Packet Filter Routing Proxies IPSec VPN Reporting Remote Management Local Logs Online Help The Tab List on the left of the screen organizes the various menus according to subject To list the menus contained under a subject heading simply click the tab the available menus will appear below For ease of use chapter 5 Using the Security system has been structured to match the order of topics in the Tab List 30 Installation 3 3 Menus Every function of the security system has its own separate menu in WebAdmin This chapter describes the tools and displays used in the configuration menus 3 3 1 The Status Light Many features and subsys tems of the security system owe can be enabled or disabled while the system is running A status light displays the current status of such sub systems e red Function is disabled e green Function is enabled For many features the configuration options and tools will not be displayed until the status light is green 3 3 2 Selection Field Selected Available With the selection fields Empty list lt a the al
6. Destination Network Address Translation DNAT is a special case of NAT whereby the destination addresses of packets are trans lated This is especially useful when an internal network uses private IP addresses but an administrator wishes to make some services available to the public Internet Important Note PPTP VPN Access is incompatible with DNAT Example 168 Using the Security System Your internal network uses the address space 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 and a web server running at IP address 192 168 0 20 port 80 should be available to Internet based clients Because the 192 168 address space is private the Internet based clients cannot send packets directly to the web server It is however possible for them to communicate with the external public address of the security system DNAT can in this case take packets ad dressed to port 80 of the system s address and forward them to the internal web server Note The method of setting up a web server behind the Internet security system is described in the Web Server DNAT guide The Web Server DNAT guide is available at http www novell com documentation nsma51 Source Network Address Translation SNAT is another special case of NAT and functions just as DNAT does with the difference that source addresses rather than destination addresses are translated This is useful in complex networks where replies should be sent from other network addresses Tip
7. A VPN server is a cost effective and secure solution for transferring sensitive data and can replace existing expensive direct connections and private lines The IPSec Concept IP Security IPSec is a suite of protocols designed for crypto graphically secure communication at the IP layer layer 3 see also chapter on page The IPSec standard defines two service modes and two protocols e Transport Mode e Tunnel Mode e Authentication Header AH Authentication protocol e Encapsulated Security Payload ESP Encryption and Authen tication protocol IPSec also offers methods for manual and automatic management of Security Associations SAs as well as key distribution These characteristics are consolidated in a Domain of Interpretation DOT IPSec Architecture Transport Mode Tunnel Mode Note This AH D O ESP Protocol lated Secu Y I Authentication Algorithm Encryption Algorithm MD5 SH 1 DES 3DES Domain of Interpretation DOI IPSec SA and Key Management Manual and Automatic Modes IPSec can work in either Transport Mode or Tunnel Mode In principle a host to host connection can use either mode If however one of the endpoints is a security gateway the Tunnel Mode must be 284 Using the Security System used The IPSec VPN connections on this security system always use the Tunnel Mode In Transport Mode the original IP packet is not 2 encapsulated in another aiai packet
8. Protocol Handling Strict TCP Session Hand ling To secure a reliable data transport the Trans mission Control Protocol TCP that is in the transport layer is used TCP then creates computer to computer connections and continues to send data until it receives an affirmative answer that the data have been transmitted This type of connection is called TCP Handshake and is executed in three steps Before a client is able to exchange data with a server for example he sends a TCP packet in the header of which there is also a so called SYN Bit sequence number This is an order to the server to set up a connection In addition the client transmits the so called window size This value defines the maximum number of bytes for the usable data in the data package so that they can be processed on the client In the second step the server replies by setting an ACK Bit Acknowledge to the header and also transmits the window size In the last step the client accepts this with the ACK Bit and starts to send the data themselves The firewall accepts PSH packets without having received a TCP Handshake This is necessary if for example after a Restart of the Internet security system or after a transfer of the second firewall system with a High Availability system the existing connections shall be maintained If the Strict TCP Session Handling function is enabled the connection set up is done by TCP Handshake 216 Using the Security
9. e 2 switches Important Note The hardware components supported by the Internet security system e g for a monitoring through Heart Beat requests are listed under http www novell com documentation nsma51 in the Hardware Compatibility List for Novell Security Manager powered by Astaro tab Important Note If you use a security system for the High Availability HA system that was already in use ensure that you update the second security system to the same version as system 1 prior to the configuration 99 Using the Security System Installing the High Availability System This installation instruction describes the necessary settings for the connection of the High Availability system to one internal network For this configuration you need three network cards on both security systems One to the internal network ethO one to the Internet eth1 and one for the data transfer connection eth2 between the two security systems For each additional internal network e g a DMZ another switch is required Preperation 1Installing the Software on both Computers 26 27 100 Install the software on both computers For a description of how to install the software please see chapter on page 16 Starting the WebAdmin Configuration Tool and Configur ing the System Passwords Configure all necessary passwords on both security systems If the High Availability system is configured and administered later with the Configu
10. the Sys tem Remote Syslog menu There usually only one Syslog Server can be defined for the security system In the RM menu the Report Manager RM can be configured independent from that as Syslog Server The data are transferred in a special RM compatible format so that the Report Manager works correctly e The SMB CIFS Share method is recommended for a WAN network architecture Once you have selected this method you make the following settings 329 Using the Security System Host From the drop down menu select the RM server to which the RM Log Files shall be sent Share Name Enter the Windows Share Name in the entry field Ensure that the associated rights for the tab have been defined in the Report Manager Username Enter the user name to use for the SMB Account Password Enter the password for the SMB Account Save the settings by clicking Save arm 2004 10 20041017 gz During a_ transfer with the SMB CIFS Share method the RM Log Files are transferred as a Gzip ASCII file Those log files are in a tab that is sub divided according to year and month example The RM log files are generated once the interface to the Report Manager is enabled and a valid IP address has been entered in the Licensed IP Address entry field After the configuration of the RM Remote Connection the RM log files are sent to the associated server 330 Using the Security System 4 10 Lo
11. 272 264 259 262 261 273 254 254 260 255 271 265 256 256 257 256 273 258 verify sender virus protection Virus Protection SNMP assigning the trap server authorizing access introduction SOCKS configuring Static Routing defining routes introduction Strict TCP Session Handling Surf Protection assigning profiles categories content removal editing categories enabling profiles adding introduction profile assignment table profile functions profiles editing profiles table skip image scanning URL blacklist URL whitelist Whitelist Domains SYN Rate Limiter System Requirements administration PC example configuration hardware System Time automatic synchronization manual configuration System Up2Date installing installing with HA solution loading and installation manual Glossary 229 258 263 263 63 62 62 244 166 166 216 239 233 234 230 234 229 237 238 235 231 240 233 232 229 215 14 13 42 52 50 377 Glossary loading automatic loading local Time Settings Up2Date Service defining upstream proxy server introduction Pattern Up2Date System Up2Date use upstream HTTP proxy Use external indicators User Authentication Active Directory NT Domain Membership Active Directory NT Membership configuration configuring LDAP configuring MS Active Directory server configuring Novell eDirectory server configuring OpenLDAP server in
12. 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 354 System Up2Date failed Invalid syntax The system updat failed Pleas contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Could not read Up2Date directory The system updat failed Pleas contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed No installation directory The system updat failed Pleas contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Could not extract tar Please start process again If the problem recurs please contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Main Up2Date package not found Please start process again If the problem recurs please contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Version conflict The system updat failed Pleas contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Dat failed Pre Stop Services script failed System Up2Date failed Post Stop Services script failed System Up2Date failed Pre Start Services script failed System Up2Date failed Starting Services failed 344 345 346 347 351 352 353 354 Using the Security System The system updat failed Pleas contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Post Start Services script failed System Up2Date failed Error
13. Allowed MAC addrs can get access To use a negative filter choose Stations in Denied MAC addrs can not get access Allowed MAC addrs If you have chosen to use a positive filter enter the MAC addresses of nodes allowed to access the wireless network in the access control list The access control list function is identical to the ordered list and is described in chapter on page 34 141 Using the Security System Denied MAC addrs If you have chosen to use a negative filter enter the MAC addresses of nodes explicitly not allowed to access the network in the access control list The access control list function is identical to the ordered list and is described in chapter on page 34 155 Confirm these settings by clicking Add The system will now check the address and network mask for semantic validity After a successful check the new interface will appear in the Current Interface Status table The interface is not yet enabled status light is red 156 Enable the interface by clicking the status light The interface is now enabled status light shows green The Oper column will at first show that the interface is Down the system requires a short time to configure and load the settings 157 Click the Refresh button to load the menu again Further information about the Refresh function can be found in chapter on page 36 When the message Up appears the interface is fully operational The network card settings are displayed in t
14. Note If more than one System Up2Date file is listed in the table start the highest version The smaller versions will be installed automatically 20 In the Actions column click Install The progress of the Up2Date installation on system 1 will be displayed in real time in the Log Window When the DONE message appears the process has completed successfully Installing System Up2Date with the HA solution 1 Open the Up2Date Service menu in the System tab 2 In the Unapplied Up2Dates Master table choose the Up2Date updates to install Note If more than one System Up2Date file is listed start with the smallest version Only one package can be installed with the HA system 21 In the Actions column click Install The progress of the Up2Date installation on system 1 will be displayed in real time in the Log Window When the DONE message appears the process has completed successfully Then the installation automatiscally starts on system 2 During this process the Up2Date package and the message Polled by slave will be displayed in the Unapplied Up2Dates Slave 52 Using the Security System table The table will show the message No locally stored Up2Date packages available when the installation on system 2 has completed successfully 22 If the Unapplied Up2Dates Master table lists more unapplied updates repeat steps 2 and 3 until all updates have been installed The HA system is fully updated when the Unapplied
15. Ping Check also allows you to check the connection with a host by entering the DNS hostname In order to do that DNS Proxy must be enabled in the Proxies DNS menu Note 188 Ping will not work unless ICMP on firewall in the Packet Filter ICMP menu is activated Name Resolution will not work unless DNS Proxy in the Proxies DNS menu is activated Using the Security System Using Ping 1Under the Network tab open the Ping Check menu 2Use the Ping Host drop down menu to select a network card If this is an interface with a host configured in one of the menus Interfaces or Networks you can select it directly from the drop down menu Example Internal Address for the internal network card on the security system For another host in the network select the setting Custom Hostname IP Address from the drop down menu 224 In the Hostname IP Address entry field enter the IP address or hostname 225 Click Start to begin the test connection 189 Using the Security System 4 4 Intrusion Protection The Intrusion Protection System IPS recognizes attacks with the help of a signature based Intrusion Detection set of rules The system analyzes the complete traffic and automatically blocks attacks before they can reach the network The existing set of rules and or IPS attack signatures are updated through the Pattern Up2Date function New IPS attack signatures will automatically be imported as IPS rule to the IPS se
16. Protection Enabling Surf Protection adding Profiles 234 Using the Security System 1Enable this option by clicking the Enable button in the Surf Protection Content Filter window 254 The status light will show green and an advanced entry window will open By Default the Profiles table contains a Blank Surf Protection Profile To add a new Blank Surf Protection Profile to the table click on the Add blank Profile button There you can edit the Surf Protection Profile Editing Surf Protection Profiles 1 255 In the Profiles table go to the Surf Protection Profile that you wish to edit In the Name field enter a descriptive name for the Surf Protection Profile Now make the settings for the Surf Protection Categories functional group in the following order Surf Protection Categories In this field choose the websites topics to which access should be blocked from your network URL Whitelist In the access control list enter those Internet addresses for which you wish to allow access even though their topic matches a topic in the Surf Protection Categories field URL Blacklist In the access control list enter those Internet ad dresses for which you wish to forbid access even though their topic doesn t match a topic in the Surf Protection Categories field 235 Using the Security System Security Note In the HTTP protocol the header of the request will be filtered by the HTTP Cache Proxy Sq
17. absolutely necessary If any is selected the DNS Proxy can be used by any Internet user Forwarding Name Servers Enter the IP addresses of your name server here Click Add to add each name server to the list Ordered Lists are described in chapter on page 34 Using the Security System All settings take effect immediately and will be saved if you leave this menu 4 6 3 SOCKS SOCKS is a generic proxy used by many client appli cations Examples include Instant Messaging Clients such as ICQ or AIM FTP clients and RealAudio SOCKS can build TCP connections for client applications and can also provide incoming listening TCP and UDP ports This is especially important for systems using NAT as SOCKS mitigates the drawbacks of having all internal clients use the same external address This security system supports the protocols SOCKSv4 and SOCKSv5 Please note however that the SOCKSv4 protocol does not support User Authentication Note If you wish to use SOCKSv5 with name resolution you must also g activate the DNS proxy service 243 Using the Security System Configuring the SOCKS Proxy 1In the Proxies tab open the SOCKS menu 2Click the Enable button next to Status to start the proxy Another entry window will open 261 Make the following settings A description of how to use the selection field tool can be found in chapter on page 31 Allowed Networks Here you can select the networks and
18. default this function is disabled A Logging Daemon compatible with Syslog protocol must be running on the selected host In the System Remote Syslog Server menu do not select one of the security system s interfaces such as ethO as the destination address host Attention Host Enter the host which should receive logging information in the drop down menu When a host has been selected log forwarding is enabled immediately no further messages are displayed In order to select a logging host i e a network with netmask 255 255 255 255 you will first have to define it in the Defin itions Networks menu The definition of networks is covered in greater detail in chapter on page 105 Service The Syslog protocol is set by default You can also use this drop down menu to configure the service port that should be used on the remote server 64 Using the Security System Logs This selection field allows you to select log files that should be delivered to the remote host 65 Using the Security System 4 1 7 User Authentication The security system supports User Authentication using the SOCKSv5 SMTP and HTTP proxy services and can control which users are allowed to use which services User accounts can be defined on the security system through the Definitions Users menu Or on an external user database Supported external databases include RADIUS SAM Windows NT Windows 2000 XP Server Microsoft A
19. from the outside Internet Answer Ma Mw y rx 5 4 3 2 1111 Request Using Destination NAT it is nevertheless possible to make internal or DMZ servers avail able to the outside network for specific services Bos w P _ Example An external user eRe Te eg see graphic on left with the IP ma address 5 4 3 2 sends a re Web _ quest from port 1111 to the Server Firewall web server in the DMZ The 192 168 2 99 80 user knows only the external IP and port 65 227 28 232 port 88 Using DNAT the firewall changes the destination address of the request to the internal address of the web server 192 168 2 99 port 80 and sends it to the web server The web server then responds using its own internal IP address 192 168 2 99 Port 80 and sends the reply back to the user The firewall recognizes the packet from the user s address and changes the source address of the reply from the Installation web server s address to its own external address 65 227 28 232 port 88 Another advanced protection mechanism is the VPN technology To meet the demands of modern business IT infrastructures must offer real time communication and allow close cooperation between business partners consultants and branch offices Increasingly these demands are being met through the use of extranets which usually operate either e via dedicated lines or e unencrypted over the Interne
20. select the action to execute if a data packet complies with the settings for Source Service and Destination In connection with this action the priority for the Quality of Service Qos function is also config ured here Important Note In order to enable the priorities high priority and low priority you must select the respective interface for the QoS function in the Network Interfaces menu and also define the values Up link Bandwidth kbits and Downlink Bandwidth kbits Allow All packets complying with this rule are allowed to pass Allow high priority All packets complying with this rule are allowed to pass In addition this data traffic gets a higher priority if the Uplink is overloaded Using the Security System Allow low priority All packets complying with this rule are allowed to pass through In addition this data traffic gets a lower priority if the Uplink is overloaded Drop All packets matching this rule are blocked Reject All packets complying with this rule are denied In addition the firewall will send an ICMP error to the sending computer Log Any violation of the rule will be reported in the Packet Filter Live Log This action is enabled by clicking on the check box For such filter violations which take place very often and which are not particularly security relevant and only reduce the readability of the Packet Filter Live Log e g Windows NetBIOS broadcasts we recommend not to enable
21. under the Packet Filter Advanced menu The functions in the Packet Filter Live Log are described in chapter on page 214 Example 199 Using the Security System Network A is a subset of network B Rule 1 allows SMTP traffic destined for Network A Rule 2 blocks SMTP for network B Result Only SMTP traffic for network A will be allowed SMTP packets from the rest of network B IP addresses will be blocked A packet filter rule is defined by the source address Source a service Service the destination address Destination and a Response Action The following values can be chosen as source and target addresses Please see the corresponding chapters of this for a more detailed explanation of how to configure and manage these targets e A Network networks are defined in the Definitions Networks menu e A Network Group network groups are defined in the Defin itions Network menu e An Interface network logical networks are defined automatically by the system when configuring a new network card or interface Interfaces can be configured in the Network Interfaces menu e An IPSec Remote Key Object IPSec User Group the IPSec User groups are defined in the Definitions Networks menu This address or port range is required when configuring packet filter rules for IPSec Road Warrior Endpoints A new defined packet filter rule is initially disabled when it is added to the table Active rules are applied in the given order
22. 1In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu 2Click on the New button The Add Interface window will open 172 In the Name entry field enter a descriptive name for the interface 150 Using the Security System 173 Use the Hardware drop down menu to select a network card Tip For an external connection e g to the Internet choose the card with Sys ID eth1 You cannot choose a network card that has already been configured with a primary network address 174 Use the Type drop down menu to select the PPP over Ethernet PPPoE DSL connection interface type You will need the connection settings provided by your ISP to configure the following settings Address If you have not been assigned a static IP address by your provider keep the default Assigned by remote setting here If you have a static IP address choose Static from the drop down menu and enter the address in the entry field If you wish to configure the Uplink Failover on Interface function observe the description of this function while entering the network Important Note Default Gateway You should probably keep the default setting Assigned by remote Other possible values are Static and None Username Enter the user name provided by your ISP Password Enter the password provided by your ISP Uplink Failover on Interface This function will only be displayed if the Assigned by remote or Static is selected in the Default Gateway drop down menu
23. 3 Prete ane Each Surf Protection Profile additionally contains a Content Filter with protection mechanisms Those protection mechanisms are e Virus Protection VP e Embedded Object Filter e Script Content Filter This Surf Protection option can only be configured when the HTTP proxy is enabled Important Note The Content Filter connects to Cobion via Port 6000 o EE EE EE EEE EE EE SSS Whitelist Domains A Whitelist with domains that are basically excluded from the Surf Protection option can be defined in the Control List The functions of the Control List are identical to the Ordered List and described in chapter on page 34 Surf Protection Categories 229 Using the Security System Eobion Surf Protection Categories 3 Show Hide 5 The Surf Protection I option contains 17 Community Education Religion Cities Countries Regione ax a eens defined Surf Pirtys Protection Categories The cat egories are based on eget Ores the URL data base Sergent ETs from Cobion Secur ity Technologies Thane Pars and can be edited in omen ye this table Gamer Gambie Editing Surf Protection Categories 1Enable this option by clicking the Enable button in the Content Filter Surf Protection window The status light will show green and an advanced entry window will open 251 Click the Show Hide button to open the table with the categories The name of c
24. 341 Using the Security System Admin notifications The Notification Log Files record all notifi cation e mails sent by the firewall This allows an administrator to monitor critical system messages even if the e mail system is down Error warning and information codes are listed in chapter on page 344 HTTP proxy The HTTP proxy logs show the activity of the HTTP proxy Packet Filter Messages relating to blocked packets are shown in the Packet Filter logs These log files are also included in the kernel logs POP3 proxy The activities of the POP3 Proxy are logged to these log files All outgoing e mails will be listed there In addition all irregularities such as interruptions or blocked e mails will be logged Portscan Detection The Portscan Detection system watches for and blocks portscans and sends e mail messages to the administrator When examining the Log Files however do not draw too many conclusions from the source IP addresses SRC and port numbers SPT as they can easily be falsified by the sender The destination addresses DST and port numbers DPT however provide useful information about what the scanner was looking for PPPOA DSL dial up The processes executed in the dial up with PPP over ATM are recorded to these log files PPPOA DSL dial up The processes executed in the dial up with PPP over Ethernet are recorded to these log files PPTP VPN Access These logs record the progress of PPTP sessions from ex
25. 359 44 121 39 360 360 360 360 361 361 361 361 362 362 363 363 364 364 364 364 365 365 365 365 366 366 358 268 98 installing Hostname HTTP ActiveDirectory NT Domain Membership mode advanced defining Parent proxy enabling the proxy global settings operation modes Parent Proxy standard mode transparent mode user authentication mode ICMP firewall forwards ping firewall forwards traceroute firewall is ping visible firewall is traceroute visible ICMP forwarding ICMP on firewall introduction log ICMP redirects ping on firewall ping settings traceroute from firewall traceroute settings Ident forward connections introduction Installation configuration instructions preparation software Installed Licenses Interfaces adding additional addresses additional address on Ethernet interface configuring a virtual LAN configuring PPPoA DSL configuring PPPoE DSL Glossary 100 121 224 227 226 224 223 223 226 223 223 223 214 213 214 213 211 212 211 212 214 214 213 212 250 250 21 16 16 46 133 133 147 156 150 369 Glossary current interface status downlink bandwidth kbits 131 148 153 159 Ethernet network card hardware list introduction monitor interface usage MTU size 131 148 153 159 notify when downlink usage below notify when downlink usage exceeds notify when uplink usage below notify when upli
26. 4 would be You will only be able to start WebAdmin once you have entered passwords for the functions listed below Enter the password for each service and then re enter it in the text field labeled Confirm The usernames are pre defined and cannot be changed WebAdmin user access to WebAdmin This user is called admin Shell Login user access to SSH This user is called loginuser Shell Administrator user administrator privileges in the entire security system This user is called root 22 13 Installation Security Note Use different passwords for the Shell Login and Shell Administrator users Configuration Manager User optional You need this pass word if you wish to configure the Security system with the Configuration Manager Boot Manager optional If set the password will prevent un authorized users from changing boot time parameters Confirm the entered passwords by clicking Save Log in to WebAdmin User admin Password Password of the WebAdmin user Please note that passwords are case sensitive Click Login Note Please follow steps through in the order listed below 23 Installation 14 Uploading the License Key In the System tab open the Licensing menu and upload the license key under the License File window Note When using a license with the High Availability HA option you must import the License Key to both security systems Normal and Hot Standby mode For mo
27. Explorer from your administration PC 1Start your Browser and open WebAdmin Before you can access the WebAdmin interface you must make sure that your browser is configured correctly Please see in chapter on page 221 for more details Once your browser is correctly configured start it and enter the management address of the security system the internal IP address configured for ethO as follows https IP Address In the example from step 6 above this would be https 192 168 2 100 A security notice will appear When you generate a certificate for WebAdmin in a later step this notice will disappear Further information on generating and installing certificates can be found in chapter on page 95 For now simply accept the security notice by clicking the Yes button 21 Installation The first time you start WebAdmin two windows will open the first contains the License Agreement and the second is used for Setting System Passwords 11 Complete the License Agreement In the License Agreement window accept the terms of the license by clicking the I agree to the terms of the license selection box Note Please read the terms of the license carefully I 12 Set the System Passwords In the Setting System Passwords window enter the pass words for the Internet security system Security Note Use a secure password Your name spelled backwards is for example not a secure password while something like xfT35
28. Note Netmask If you wish to use a statically defined network mask for this interface use the drop down menu to select Static and enter the netmask to use in the entry field If you wish to have a netmask dynamically assigned via DHCP select Assign by DHCP from the drop down menu Default Gateway If you wish to use a statically defined default gateway use the drop down menu to select Static and enter the address of the gateway in the entry field If you wish to have a gateway dynamically assigned via DHCP select Assign by DHCP from the drop down menu Otherwise select None Proxy ARP When this function is enabled the security system will answer ARP requests on the selected interface for all known networks This system will thus act as a proxy on this interface for all of the other directly connected networks This function is only required in special cases for example when an attached network cannot be configured with normal routing entries e g when the network includes a router over which you have no control By default the Proxy ARP function is disabled Off To enable it select On from the drop down menu Uplink Failover on Interface This function will only displayed if the parameter Assign by DHCP or Static has been selected in the Default Gateway drop down menu 128 Using the Security System If a network card is an interface to the Internet e g 2 Megabit fixed connection you can configure a standby connection
29. Profiles to a network is possible in every operation mode If you are simultaneously assigning a Profile to a local user and to a network this Profile will only take effect if the user accesses the HTTP proxy from the configured network Only one Surf Protec tion Profile can be configured for each user or network Important Note If you have configured the User Authentication configuration mode in the Global Settings window the Profile Assignment via drop down menu will be displayed above the Profile Assignment table By default this is set to Local Users Network blocks If you have configured a Radius or LDAP Server in the System User Authentication menu they will be displayed in the drop down menu Once you have selected one of the servers the Profile Assignment table will be masked m If you have configured Sanat g the Active Directory zno urt whitest ut Bach Bt ereenn NT Domain Member 4 a ship user authentication in the System User Authentication menu and have configured the corresponding operation mode in the Global Settings window the Profile Order Activation hierarchy field will be displayed above the Profile Assignment table Clicking on the corresponding check box enables the Profile The buttons in the right column allow you to Profile Order Activation 237 Using the Security System change the order of the groups The buttons are described in more detail in chapter on page
30. Service menu in the System tab 2 Click the Enable button under Update automatically 23 In the selection menu Interval specify how often the security system should contact the Up2Date Server to check for new Pattern Up2Dates The available choices are every hour every day or once per week Security Note Choose the hourly update option to ensure that your sys tem is always up to date The automatic Pattern Up2Date is now activated The Security sys tem will contact the Up2Date Server at regular intervals and check for new Pattern Up2Dates Whenever new Pattern Up2Dates are installed the administrator will be sent an e mail containing a list of the newest virus signatures When using the High Availability HA solution the virus scanner on system 2 will be automatically synchronized with system 1 Use Upstream HTTP Proxy 54 Using the Security System Use Upson HITE In this window you can define i the connection to an Up stream Proxy Server This function is required if you can only connect through such an Upstream Proxy to HTTP and HTTPS ports Defining an Upstream Proxy Server 1Open the Up2Date Service menu in the System tab 2Click Enable next to Status to enable the function and make the following settings Proxy IP Address Enter the IP address of the Upstream Proxy server into the entry field Proxy TCP Port Enter the port number of the Upstream Proxy server into the entry field 24 Save
31. System Validate Packet Length The Packet Filter checks the data packets for minimal length if the icmp tcp or udp protocol is being used The minimal data lengths for the individual protocols are e icmp 22 bytes e tcp 48 bytes e udp 28 bytes If the data packets are shorter than the minimal values they are blocked and recorded to the Packet Filter log file with the annotation INVALID_PKT The log files are administered in the Local Logs Browse menu Logging Options Log Unique DNS Requests wwe DNS packets which are sent to or through the Firewall and receive a DNS request are recorded to the Packet Filter log file with the annotation DNS_REQUEST The log files are administered in the Local Logs Browse menu Log FTP Data Connections All FTP data connections either in the active or in the passive mode are recorded to the Packet Filter log file with the annotation FTP_DATA The log files are administered in the Local Logs Browse menu 217 Using the Security System System Information System information PONELE Packet Filter Live Log The tan Packat Fiter Rules Packet Filter Live Log iz monitors the packet filter and NAT rules in place on the Security system The window provides a real time display of packets intercepted by the packet filter This is especially useful in troubleshooting and debugging packet filter rules If after the security system starts a networked application such as o
32. The original IP L encrypted header is retained and the ae rest of the packet is sent either in clear text AH or encrypted ESP Either the complete packet can be authenticated with AH or the payload can be encrypted and authenticated using ESP In both cases the original header is sent over the WAN in clear text IP Packets Original AH Transport Mode AH Header Header Original ESP Transport Mode ESP Header Header The original packet In Tunnel Mode the com IP Packets Is encapsulated Tunnel Mode an New AH Orginal TISNA plete packet header and authenticates payload is encapsulated Tunnel Mode ESP esger Header Header PaVIoad in a new IP packet An IP srenptes a header is added to the IP packet with the destination address set to the receiving tunnel endpoint The IP addresses of the encapsulated packets remain unchanged The original packet is then authenticated with AH or encrypted and authenticated using ESP 285 Using the Security System IPSec Protocols IPSec uses two protocols to communicate securely on the IP level e Authentication Header AH a protocol for the authentication of packet senders and for ensuring the integrity of packet data e Encapsulating Security Payload ESP a protocol for en crypting the entire packet and for the authentication of its contents The Authentication Header Protocol AH checks the authenticity and integrity of packet data In addition it
33. To build a simple translation system from an internal network to the g Internet use the Masquerading function instead of SNAT In contrast to Masquerading which is dynamic SNAT uses a static address translation That is every internal address is translated to its own externally visible IP address 169 Using the Security System Note In order to forward port 443 HTTPS to an internal server you must first change the value of the WebAdmin TCP Port e g 1443 for WebAdmin in the System WebAdmin Settings menu This function is described in chapter in chapter General Settings Note Because translation occurs before Packet filtering you must ensure that appropriate rules are entered in the Packet Filter Rules menu More information on setting packet filter rules can be found in chapter on page 190 Defining NAT rules 1In the Network tab open the NAT Masquerading menu 2In the Name field enter a descriptive name for this NAT rule 194 195 170 In the Rule type drop down menu select the DNAT SNAT function A window named Properties will open In the Packets to match window define which packets should be translated At least one parameter in this window must be defined in order to create a valid DNAT SNAT rule The setting No match means that packets will not be matched on the basis of this parameter Source address Choose the original source address here This can be either a single host or an e
34. URL https 192 168 10 1 enter 192 168 10 1 here 101 Save your entries by clicking the Save button Installing a Certificate for WebAdmin 1 To install the CA Certificate in your browser click Import Certificate into Browser in the CA Certificate Installation window The next few steps depend on your browser For example with Microsoft Internet Explorer the File download dialog opens Save file to disk This option allows you to save the certificate to a local disk before installing it Open the file from current position This allows you to install the certificate directly The Certificate window will open These registers allow you to inspect the information contained in the certificate before installing it 96 Using the Security System 102 Click the OK button to start the process Note Due to system time differences and timezone offsets the generated I certificate may not yet be valid Many browsers wrongly report that such certificates have expired however this is not the case and any generated certificates will become valid after a maximum of 12 hours 97 Using the Security System 4 1 10 High Availability The main cause for a Internet security system and or a firewall failure is a hardware failure such as a failure of the power supply hard disk or processor The High Availability HA system allows you to use two security systems with identical hardware in parallel Security system 1 runs in normal mo
35. Up2Dates Master table shows the message No locally stored Up2Date packages available and if both systems display the same version number Pattern Up2Date Pattern The Pattern Up2Date function wt aap _ updates the virus patterns for the security system s integrated virus scanner and the Intrusion Protection System IPS with IPS attack signatures You can choose to update signatures manually or automatically at certain intervals The Latest Pattern Up2Dates table shows the date of the most recently installed Pattern Up2Date Virus Protection Patterns and Intrusion Protection attack signatures will be listed separately Manual Pattern Up2Date 1 Open the Up2Date Service menu in the System tab 2 In the Pattern Up2Date window click the Start button under Update now The system checks now whether new Pattern Up2Date packages are available on the Update Server downloads and installs them to the Internet security system Details on the complete Up2Date process 53 Using the Security System can be found in the Log Window shown in real time When the DONE message appears the process has completed successfully The Installed Pattern Date will be updated when you click the Up2Date Service under the System tab or when you next open this menu When using the High Availability HA solution the virus scanner on system 2 will be automatically synchronized with system 1 Automatic Pattern Up2Date 1 Open the Up2Date
36. Uplink Failover on Interface function Enter the IP address of a host here which replies to the ICMP Ping requests and which in addition to that is always reachable The security system will send ping requests to this host if no answer is received the backup interface will be enabled by the failover In this entry field there must always be an IP address for the failover QoS Status In order to use Quality of Service QoS band width management on an interface enable this option To enable the Quality of Service QoS function select On from the drop down menu Important Note For the bandwidth management Quality of Service QoS you must define the values for Uplink Bandwidth kbits and Downlink Bandwidth kbits These values are used as basis for the bandwidth management system incorrect values can lead to poor management of the data flow The Quality of Service QoS function is described in chapter 158 181 182 Using the Security System Uplink Bandwidth kbits These settings will only appear if the QoS function is enabled In this entry menu enter the avail able bandwidth for the Uplink in full kilobits This value can be determined either from the values of the upstream interface or from the router On an interface to the Internet this value corresponds to the bandwidth of the Internet connection on an ADSL access the Uplink bandwidth amounts to 128 kBit s and on a 2 Megabit fixed connection to 2048
37. Websites can be excluded from the control In the current version these are images in GIF and JPEG format The chance that these components are infected with a virus is very low Whereas the performance of the option can be increased by up to 25 Clicking on the Enable button enables this function 240 Using the Security System 4 6 2 DNS The DNS Proxy service al lows you to provide internal clients with a secure and efficient name server ser vice If you select multiple remote name servers they will be queried in the order they are entered The DNS entries in network definitions are resolved every minute by the DNS resolver If now a DNS entry refers to a Round Robin DNS the definition can be actualized every minute The Round Robin DNS process offers an easy opportunity to distribute user requests to individual servers such as to a server farm With the Round Robin DNS the IP addresses of all servers of the server farm are assigned to a hostname in the Domain Name Service DNS If clients now request the IP address of this hostname there the DNS sequentially reports these IP addresses back Thus a distribution of the client requests to the respective servers is achieved The disadvantage of the Round Robin process is that neither a failure nor the utilization of the individual servers is accounted for If no name servers are entered in the Forwarding Name Servers menu the proxy will use the Internet wide ROOT n
38. a VPN protected connection No other computer can transmit information over this connection VPN connections can be established between two hosts one host and one network or two networks When one endpoint is a single com puter the VPN connection will extend all the way to that computer where the data is encrypted and decrypted If one end point is a net work the connection will end at a Security Gateway which man ages the VPN functions for the rest of the network The data trans mission within the network between the security gateway and client computers is not encrypted Data transfer between two computers over a Public Wide Area Network WAN uses public routers switches and other network components This is in general not secure as messages can be read in clear text at every point between the end computers An IPSec VPN however builds a secured IP Security IPSec tunnel through the public WAN Messages sent through this tunnel cannot be read An IPSec tunnel consists of a two directional Security Associations SAs one for each direction of communication 280 Using the Security System An IPSec SA consists of three components e the Security Parameter Index SPI e the IP address of the receiver e a Security Protocol Authentication Header AH or En capsulated Security Payload ESP With the help of the SA the IPSec VPN tunnel has the following features e Data confidentiality through encryption e Dat
39. a network card for a standard Ethernet con nection to an internal or ex ternal network you must configure the card with an IP address and netmask All network cards installed on the security system are shown in the Hardware List Configuring a Standard Ethernet Connection 1In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu 2Click on the New button The Add Interface window will open 129 In the Name entry field enter a descriptive name for the interface example Externally for an Internet connection 130 Use the Hardware drop down menu to select a network card Tip For an external connection e g to the Internet choose the card with Sys ID eth1 131 Use the drop down menu Type to select Standard Ethernet Interface Please note that one network card cannot be used as both a Standard ethernet interface and a PPP over Ethernet PPPoE DSL or PPPTP over Ethernet PPPoA DSL con nection simultaneously 132 Now make the specific settings for this interface type 127 Using the Security System Address If you wish to use a static IP address for this interface select Static from the drop down menu and enter the address to use in the entry field If you wish to have a gateway dynamically assigned via DHCP select Assign by DHCP from the drop down menu If you wish to configure the Uplink Failover on Interface function observe the description of this function while entering the network Important
40. a unique CN Security Note User authentication with a stand alone LDAP server involves sending passwords in clear text over the network As these passwords are not encrypted an attacker with access to the network may be able to intercept them Note User authentication with an LDAP Server requires that the DNS Proxy on the Proxies DNS menu be enabled 78 Using the Security System Configuring the Microsoft Active Directory Server Make sure that there is a user configured on your LDAP server to have full read privileges for the directory This will be the query user Security Note Make sure that the user has only read privileges Microsoft Active Directory AD can grant privileges on the basis of group memberships or on the basis of particular user attributes In most cases it is easier to use the Member Of query type to authenticate by group The Directory can be extended by self defined attributes If you wish to authenticate on the basis of particular User Attributes every user account in the directory must be edited to define access rights This is done by setting a particular attribute for each user which either grants or denies access to a service Ls The following example illus trates the configuration for a hypothetical small company example com The user John Smith is in the Trainees directory DN cn john smith ou trainees dc example dc com C LogonName smith example com Thi
41. be listed in a table below the selection menu Clicking the trash can icon 8 deletes the defined connection from the table 197 Using the Security System Performance Tuning The performance of the Intrusion Prevention System IPS can be enhanced through the settings in this window in which the servers and ports are defined The correspondent IPS rules will only be used for the configured servers and ports The server must first be added as host in the Definitions Networks menu For more information on adding hosts please refer to chapter on page 106 Note If you don t configure a server in this window the Intrusion Protection System IPS will monitor the complete data traffic ac cording to the settings in the Global Settings window HTTP Service In this drop down menu select the target port for the HTTP data traffic by selecting a Service In the Definitions Ser vices menu you can change or add a Service if necessary The added service will only use the target port number In the case of a port range only the first and last port will be used Example In a port range 80 8080 the HTTP rule will be used for the target port 80 and 8080 HTTP Servers Select the HTTP servers in this selection field DNS Servers Select the DNS servers in this selection field SMTP Servers Select the SMTP servers in this selection field SQL Servers Select the SQL servers in this selection field Telnet Servers Select the Telnet s
42. by a second Internet access e g DSL connection and an additional network card If the primary connection fails the uplink will automatically be set up through the backup Internet access In order to monitor the connection the Primary Interface sends four ping requests to the Uplink Failover check IP every five seconds Only if all four ping requests are not replied to the Backup Interface is loaded When the Internet connection is established via the Backup Interface the ping requests are still sent by the Primary Inter face As soon as the security system receives the corresponding reply packages to the ping requests again the Internet con nection is again established by the Primary Interface Important Note When the Uplink Failover on Interface function is used two different networks must be defined on the Primary and Backup Interface Therefore you need two separate Internet accesses next to the additional network card Uplink Failover on Interface is by default disabled Off If you wish to use this network card as primary Internet con nection then configure it in the Primary Interface drop down menu If this network card shall contain the standby connection select the setting Backup Interface Uplink Failover check IP This entry field will be displayed if the Primary Interface setting has been selected for the Uplink Failover on Interface function Enter the IP address of a host here which replies to the ICMP Ping reque
43. configuration is required on the client of the end user Configuring the POP3 Proxy Normally the POP3 proxy must only be enabled in order to process POP3 requests as it proxies for all networks by default The Configured Proxied Networks displays which networks are to be allowed If only POP3 requests from certain networks should be forwarded the configuration must be changed Note that the drop down menus contain only those networks you have already defined in the Definitions Networks menu Example POP3 queries from the subnet 192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0 to pop yoursite com should be forwarded through the proxy These networks must first be defined in the Networks menu Once this is done continue as follows 245 Using the Security System 1In the Proxies tab open the POP3 menu 2Click the Enable button next to Status to start the proxy An advanced entry window will open 262 Inthe Proxied Networks window choose the networks that the proxy should intercept requests from and to Source Choose the source address here Example The name of the 192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0 network Destination Choose the destination address here Example The name of the pop yoursite com network 263 Confirm your selection by clicking Add Content Filter Virus Protection This op tion scans e mails and at tachments passing through the proxy for dangerous contents such as viruses or Trojan horses The results of the scan are in
44. connection type 286 Make the following basic settings for the IPSec VPN connection IPSec Policy The policy controls the parameters for the VPN connection This includes the settings for Key Exchange IKE and the IPSec connection The drop down menu contains a number of pre defined policies You can define custom ones in the IPSec VPN Policies menu Note standard policy is used for the MS Windows L2TP IPSec type of connection The configuration of IPSec Policies is detailed in chapter on page 297 Auto Packet Filter Once the IPSec VPN connection is success fully established the packet filter rules for the data traffic will automatically be added After the completion of the connection the packet filter rules will be removed The Auto Packet Filter function is available for the Standard and road warrior connection types 292 Using the Security System Security Note If you want greater control over the packet filter rules or wish to manage them in a more centralized way disable the Auto Packet Filter function and enter the rules manu ally in the Packet Filter Rules menu Strict Routing When this function is enabled On VPN Rout ing is not only done with the destination address but in harmony with the source and destination address If Strict Routing is enabled it is possible to simultaneously set encrypted and decrypted connections from different source addresses to one network If the Strict Routing fu
45. enabled In this entry menu enter the available bandwidth for the Uplink in full kilobits This value can be determined either from the values of the upstream interface or from the router Downlink Bandwidth kbits This setting will only appear if the QoS function is enabled In this entry menu enter the available bandwidth for the Downlink in full kilobits MTU Size The MTU is the size in bytes of the largest trans mittable packet MTU stands for Maximum Transfer Unit For connections using the TCP IP protocol the data will be grouped into packets A maximum size will be defined for these packets Packets larger than this value will be considered too long for the connection and fragmented into smaller ones before transmis sion These data packets will be sent again However the per Using the Security System formance can be limited if the upper value is too low The largest possible MTU for an Ethernet interface is 1500 Bytes The following values are the defaults for the VLAN Ethernet Interface 1500 Byte 169 Confirm these settings by clicking Add The system will now check the address and network mask for semantic validity After a successful check the new interface will appear in the Current Interface Status table The interface is not yet enabled status light is red 170 Enable the interface by clicking the status light The interface is now enabled status light shows green The Oper column will at first show
46. ending with the first matching rule The order of this process will be displayed in the table through the Position number second column from the left If you re sort the rules table later for example according to the source address please note that the rules won t be displayed in the order in which the system processes the rules If however you change the numerical rule order via the Position number the processing order will change correspondingly In our example if rule 2 were moved to be before rule 1 all SMTP traffic for both networks 200 Using the Security System would be blocked Be very careful when defining rules and their order as this will determine the security of your firewall When one filter rule applies all other rules will be ignored The g sequence of rules is thus very important Never place a rule like Any Source Any Service Any Destination Allow Action at the top of the rule set Important Note Setting Packet Filter Rules 1Under the Packet Filter tab open the Rules menu 2Click on the New button Packet Filter Rules Total 1 entries A 5 New Rule Rule Filters 7 Live Log Position To bottom z Group none Source Marketing Network z Service HTTP Destination Any X Action Allow z Comment Example rule I Log Add Definition a El ar B SS Network p Ea ee Any Example rule The entry window will open 228 Make the following settings Positio
47. enter the address to use in the entry field If you wish to have a gateway dynamically assigned via DHCP select Assign by DHCP from the drop down menu Netmask If you wish to use a statically defined network mask for this interface use the drop down menu to select Static and enter the netmask to use in the entry field If you wish to have a netmask dynamically assigned via DHCP select Assign by DHCP from the drop down menu 147 Using the Security System 148 Default Gateway If you wish to use a statically defined default gateway use the drop down menu to select Static and enter the address of the gateway in the entry field If you wish to have a gateway dynamically assigned via DHCP select Assign by DHCP from the drop down menu Otherwise select None VLAN Tag Enter the VLAN tag to use for this interface QoS Status In order to use Quality of Service QoS band width management on an interface enable this option To enable the Quality of Service QoS function select On from the drop down menu Important Note For the bandwidth management Quality of Service QoS you must define the values for Uplink Bandwidth kbits and Downlink Bandwidth kbits These values are used as basis for the bandwidth management system incorrect values can lead to poor management of the data flow The Quality of Service QoS function is described in chapter Uplink Bandwidth kbits This setting will only appear if the QoS function is
48. entry window will open 103 Make the following settings Name In the entry field enter a unique host name This name will be used later for example to configure packet filter rules Allowed characters are The only allowed characters are alphanumeric characters minus space and underscore _ Names may be up to 39 characters long Type Select Host from the drop down menu Address Enter the IP address in the entry field Comment You can enter a host description in this entry field 104 Save the host by clicking on the Add Definition button If the definition is successful the new Host will be entered in the network table You will now find this host under its name also in different other menus You could for example define this host under System Remote Syslog as Remote Syslog Server 107 Using the Security System Adding Network 1Under the Definitions tab open the Networks menu 2Click on the New Definition button The entry window will open 105 Make the following settings Name In the entry field enter a network name This name will be used later for example to configure packet filter rules Allowed characters are The only allowed characters are alphanumeric characters minus space and underscore _ Names may be up to 39 characters long Type Select Network from the drop down menu Address Netmask Enter the IP address in the entry field and select the network mask from the drop down menu C
49. execute those services The Mail MX Records are already published by all domains to inform others on those computers which contain e mails for this domain By SPF are now published the reverse Mail MX Records in which it is disclosed which computers send e mails from a specific domain The receiver of a mail can only control those Records and determine whether they have really been sent from this domain Use BATV The Bounce Address Tag Validation BATV function is a tool of the standardizing body Internet Engineering Task Force IETF Through domain keys the Internet Service Provider ISP shall be able to reject unwanted mass e mails more easily by 256 Using the Security System preventing that the sender address of an e mail is concealed or falsified Through the BATV function an encrypted digital signature is appended to outgoing e mails which displays the server of the sender Through e mails put into quarantine by the firewall you will see that 40 of the Spam Mails are Bounce Mails The appended signature allows the system to determine whether the Bounce Mail you have received was originally caused by your e mail and not through the sender of Spam Mails who falsified the sender address This type of Spam Mails will then always be rejected by the firewall without the risk of false positives In addition to that this function is used to reject all e mails without sender address Please note that the signature crea
50. how to use selection fields 322 In the Mode drop down menu select the mode 323 If you are looking for protocols with specific strings enter the strings into the Search Term entry field 324 Begin the search by clicking Start The protocols will be listed in a separate window 335 Using the Security System 4 10 3 Browse Each protocol is contained in the Browse menu If this menu is opened the protocol groups logs will be displayed in the Browse Local Log Files overview The Log File Overview All protocol groups logs are contained in this overview The groups with the current protocols can directly be opened from this overview r a Accounting data B ofites 0 o a Admin notifications D 2files Today 16kB amp Oo a Boot messages 2files 3182 amp ria Content filter BD 1 files Today 608 amp r3 DHCP server D 1 files Today 023 amp ri DNS proxy BD 2files Today 38kB e na HTTP proxy 2 files Today 8581 2 Oo a Intrusion Protection System DB 2fites Today 5149 E Oo a Kernel messages 2 files Today 1993 2 oO a Local logins BD 2fites Today 2567 2 r a Logging subsystem BD 2 fites Today 1074 2 oOo a Packet filter D files Now 2454kB amp r9 PPTP daemon B 1 files Today 149 amp o a Selfmonitoring BD 2files Today 2405 amp ria SMTP proxy B 2fites Today 627kB amp r3 SSH daemon DB 2 fites Today 2416 amp Oo a System log messages 2 files Today 58kB 2 oOo a Up2Date messages a 2 files 190 a mj a Us
51. in days after which the log files will automatically be deleted by the security system Configuring the Log Files Level For each level the following settings can be configured When Usage reaches Configure here at which utilization in percent of the system partition an action will be executed do this Configure the action in this selection menu The following actions can be configured e Delete oldest Log Files The oldest log files will automatically be deleted by the Security system The administrator previously receives the WARN 711 notification e mail e Send Notification Only the INFO 710 notification e mail with the correspondent warning will be sent to the administrator e Shut down System The security system will automatically shut down The administrator receives the CRIT 712 notification e mail before 332 Using the Security System e Nothing No actions will be started Save the settings by clicking on the Save button Remote Log File Archive In this window configure the settings for a remote log files archive If the Remote Log File Archive is on a ser ver you must first add it to the Definitions Networks menu Configuring Remote Log File Archive 1In the Global Settings window enable the Remote Log File Archives function by clicking on the Enable button The Remote Log File Archive window will open 319 Use the Type drop down menu to select the archiving type The drop down menus and
52. in the accompanying documentation You can find these documents at http www novell com documentation Ig edir87 index html Then make the settings for the Internet security system The settings in the configuration tool WebAdmin are explained on page 88 86 Using the Security System Configuring the OpenLDAP Server Make sure that there is a user configured on your LDAP server to have full read privileges for the directory This will be the query user Security Note Make sure that the user has only read privileges With OpenLDAP users are identified on the basis of their Common Names CN Please make certain that every user has a unique CN With the installation of the software alle existing data will be deleted Important Note from the computer Because there are many different LDAP servers based on the OpenLDAP code it is impossible to describe them all here For further information please consult the documentation accompanying your LDAP server If you are using the SLAPD server from the OpenLDAP Foundation the current documentation is available at http www openldap org Configuring LDAP on your Security System Make sure that there is a user configured on your LDAP server to have full read privileges for the directory This will be the query user You will need the Distin guished Name DN of this user as well as the IP address of your LDAP server in order to complete the confi
53. in the field If the firewall receives an e mail from a blocked address a 5xx error code will be issued with the message Your address envelope or header is blacklisted at this site 255 Using the Security System Use RBL The Realtime Blackhole Lists RBL function uses an ex ternal database of known spam senders to check sending addresses Several services of this type are available on the Internet This function helps to massively reduce the number of spam One commercial service for example can be found at http www mail abuse org The Internet addresses of the data bases are entered in the Feature Settings window into the RBL Zones control list The function of the Control List is identical to the Ordered List and described in chapter on page 34 Deny RCPT Hacks The proxy will reject e mails with a sender address containing the characters or Jor an additional In addition addresses with an extra symbol or which begin with a dot will also be blocked SPF Fail Check With this function the Firewall controls through the Sender Policy Framework SPF whether ingoing e mails have been sent from the correct server SPF is made available through specific DNS entries which are requested here Through SPF the owners of a domain can publish information on their mail servers in DNS A domain uses public Records DNS to direct requests for the different services e g HTTP SMTP etc to those computers which
54. input field Search text Example X Spam Score Then click on the button Next 279 What do you want to do with message step 3 Define in this window what has to be done with the filtered e mail If for instance you want to move the filtered e mails to a specific folder select the action move it to a specified folder With one click on Specified folder in the window Rule description a new menu appears Here you can either choose an existing folder or create a new destination folder for the filtered e mails Example Spam Click OK to save the new settings in this menu Then click on the button Next 280 Add exceptions step 4 269 Using the Security System 281 282 270 The module Spam Detection heuristically checks incoming e mails for certain characteristics It therefore might be that safe messages e g HTML Newsletter are filtered This menu allows you to define exceptions and to thus exclude e mails e g messages of a particular sender from this rule Then click on the button Next Enter a name for this rule step 5 Type a distinct name for this rule into the input field In the options fields below you can activate these rules and also apply them on e mails which are already in the Inbox folder You can change your settings in the window Rule description Then click on the button Finish Apply rules in the following order step 6 In the Rules Wizard you can activate or deactivate the rules by one click
55. interface type requires a statically defined net mask This kind of interface can only use static masks Default Gateway If you wish to use a default gateway with this interface select Static from the drop down menu and enter the gateway address in the entry field Otherwise select None 140 Confirm these settings by clicking Add 133 Using the Security System The system will now check the address and network mask for semantic validity After a successful check the new interface will appear in the Current Interface Status table The interface is not yet enabled status light is red 141 Enable the interface by clicking the status light The interface is now enabled status light shows green The Oper column will at first show that the interface is Down the system requires a short time to configure and load the settings 142 Click the Refresh button to load the menu again Further information about the Refresh function can be found in chapter on page 36 When the message Up appears the interface is fully operational The network card settings are displayed in the Parameters column 134 Using the Security System 4 3 2 3 Wireless LAN The industry standards IEEE 802 11 apply to Wireless LAN This Internet security system supports the IEEE 802 11b protocol This standard uses radio signals in the ISM frequencies in the 2 4 GHz band to communicate between nodes ISM stands for Industrial Scientific and Medical The
56. internal systems but you are only interested in collecting accounting data for outbound traffic ince it might only be used for internal means it might not be useful to consider its traffic data In the Reporting Accounting menu you can monitor the collected accounting data and edit accounting rules 186 Using the Security System Do not use accounting on network interfaces Doing so may over Important Note load the system Configuring Traffic Accounting 1In the Network tab open the Accounting menu 2Enable the function by clicking the Enable button The status light will show green and another entry window will open 222 Inthe Interfaces selection field choose the network cards Please see chapter on page 31 for a description of how to use selection fields 223 Use the Ignored Networks selection menu to choose which networks to ignore The settings in the Traffic Accounting menu will immediately be enabled 187 Using the Security System 4 3 8 Ping Check Ping allows you to test the connection with a remote host on the IP level Please note that these tools require that the ICMP on firewall option under the Packet Filter ICMP menu be enabled Ping sends an ICMP Echo Packet to the remote machine When this packet is received by the remote machine its TCP IP stack will generate an ICMP Reply Packet and send it back This allows you to test that IP level connectivity with the remote machine
57. left hand column display the list in ascending and descending numerical order respectively while the and Y 34 Installation buttons in the middle column display the list in ascending or descending alphabetical order The functional order as indicated by the numbers to the left of each entry can be adjusted using the buttons in the right hand column A click on the or button in this column will move the entry one row up i e towards 1 or down towards the end of the list respectively Similarly you can move an entry to the very beginning or end of the list by clicking the or buttons in this column respectively Add entry Type a value in the text entry field and click Add The new value will appear in the last row of the table Delete entry By double clicking an entry you can remove it from the list Edit entry If you click an entry once it will appear in the entry field Edit the entry as desired and click the Replace button to put it back into the list 3 4 Online Help Every menu in WebAdmin has an Online Help screen which provides a short explanation of the available configuration options You can open the help screen by clicking the button at the top right hand corner of the screen 35 Using the Security System 3 5 Refresh 36 To load the menu again click the Refresh button Don t use the Refresh button of the tool bar of your browser to actualize the menu otherwise
58. light is green Traceroute Settings Traceroute is a tool used to check and troubleshoot network routing This tool can resolve the path to an IP address Traceroute lists the IP addresses of the routers that had been used to transport the sent packet Should the packet path not be reported within a certain time interval traceroute will report a star instead of the IP address After a certain number of failures the 212 Using the Security System test will end An interruption of the test can have any number of causes notably a packet filter along the network path that blocks traceroute packets This window shows advanced options related to ICMP Traceroute The settings here can also open the UDP ports UNIX Traceroute uses Firewall is Traceroute visible When this function is enabled the firewall will respond to Traceroute packets Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green Firewall forwards Traceroute When this function is enabled the firewall will forward Traceroute packets Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green Note These two functions Firewall is Traceroute visible and Firewall forwards Trace route are probably only useful when both are enabled Traceroute from Firewall The Traceroute command can be used on the firewall Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green 213 Using the Security System
59. n O SMTP 15h 25m lt do not re fw notify net gt B host domain com INFO 112 middleware not running mj SATP 18h21m lt do not re fw notify net gt BG host domain com INFO 361 Virus Pattern Up2Date r 8 SMTP 18h21m lt do not re fw notify net gt B host domain com INF0 354 Intrusion Protection P cr a SATP 19h 42m lt do not re fw notify net gt B host domain com WARN 005 Failed login D 8 SMTP 19h 43m lt do not re fw notify net gt B host domain com INFO 000 System was restarted m a SATP 1d Oh 38m lt do not re fw notify net gt B host domain com INFO 000 System was restarted SMTP 1d 1h 5m lt do not re fw notify net gt B host domain com INFO 000 System was restarted a a EE Please select X ID Every e mail in this security system contains a unique ID This ID is contained in the header of the message and is used by the system to identify messages in the log files The ID will be displayed when you touch the entry in the Type field with the mouse Type Proxy Content Manager distinguishes between the POP3 and SMTP types of filtered e mail If you touch the entry with the mouse the Mail ID will be displayed Clicking on the entry opens a window with the content of the message Thus you can safely read important messages Messages of a length of up to 500 lines will be displayed completely Age This column displays the age of an e mail i e the perio
60. network cards normally will be determined by PCI ID and by the Kernel drivers The sequence of network card names may also change if the hardware configuration is changed especially if network cards are removed or added Reboot the System Reboot the security system by pressing Ctrl Alt Del or the Reset button During the boot process the IP addresses of the internal network cards are changed The Install Routine console Alt F1 may display the message No IP on etho during this time After the security system has rebooted a process which depending on hardware can take up to five minutes ping the IP Address of the ethO interface to ensure it is reachable If no connection is possible please check for the following possible problems Error The security system is not reachable from the internal network Possible Causes 20 Installation e The IP address of the security system is incorrect e The IP address of the client computer is incorrect e The default gateway on the client is incorrect e The network cable is connected to the wrong network card e All network cards are connected to the same hub Note If you connect to the Internet through a DSL connection please read I the installation instructions at http www novell com documentation nsma5 2 2 2 Configuring the Security System The rest of the configuration will use the WebAdmin interface accessed through a standard web browser e g MS Internet
61. or delete reports 322 Using the Security System Report for current Month This window displays the accounting report for the current month Configuring Accounting 1Under the Reporting tab select the Accounting menu 2Enable the Accounting Reports subsystem by clicking the Enable button The entry window will open 318 Use the selection field in the Queried networks window to select the networks for which detailed reports should be generated This will usually include your LAN and or DMZ networks Please see chapter on page 31 for a description of how to use selection fields Do NOT use the Any network since it will match all source and I destination networks meaning no traffic will be counted in the report Important Note The changes will be applied immediately and the networks will appear in the Queried networks window 323 Using the Security System 4 8 13 System Information System Information Interface Information ARP Table Local Network Connections F hont demnain com Oisk Partition Status Microsoft Internet Esplanar host domain com Disk Partition Status e Tilesyotes obiecks Uot Available Ure Mounted on totta ON WNE NO SH ienirst ENS WNA NO SR 7 tapte 32760 ne 29484 118 opt tapts laeran 350007 1506P 316045 S msot Joera 14845760 204764 13874696 24 var storege Jeras 350007 n 32695 J var upldate Jier hiad 396623 mmaa 144099 E20 var see Laermans 19625458 37508 1074s
62. reliable When you use an upstream firewall it must allow traffic from the security system to the Internet on the following ports They are used for communication to the Spam Protection databases TCP Port 2703 UDP Port 6277 UDP Port 53 DNS Important Note Two Thresholds can be defined for the Spam Score This ensures that potential SPAM e mails are treated differently by the Firewall The two Thresholds are equal whereas the threshold with the higher level should be treated more severely The functioning is explained below with the help of the default settings 265 Usi ng the Security System Default settings Threshold One When Spam Level exceeds 05 reasonable do this Quarantine Threshold Two When Spam Level exceeds 08 conservative do this Reject The and first threshold implicates that e mails from level 5 on are filtered put in quarantine The e mail will be displayed in the Proxy Content Manger menu with the status Quarantine With the second threshold the e mail will be sent back with a comment Basically the Threshold with the higher level is treated more severely do this busy systems the Spam Detection may require a large Important Note On percentage of system resources When Spam Level exceeds This drop down menu can be used to select the strategy to use in marking messages as spam The difference between the maximum values is defined through the probability that legi
63. security system and port 8080 Transparent In this mode the system notices HTTP requests on the internal network automatically processes them and forwards them to the remote server The client browser is entirely unaware of the proxy server The advantage of this mode is that no additional adminis tration or configuration is required on the client the disadvantage is that only pure HTTP port 80 requests can be forwarded All networks allowed to use the transparent proxy must be explicitly listed in the Allowed Networks menu When Transparent mode is used the client browser settings cannot be used to control proxy settings Moreover no data can be downloaded from a FTP server in this mode HTTPS connections SSL must be executed via a Packet Filter User Authentication This mode complies with the functions of the Standard mode In addition user access to the HTTP proxy is only authorized after previous Authentication 223 Using the Security System Active Directory NT Domain Membership This mode is only available if you have selected the Active Directory NT Domain Membership authentication method in the menu If this operation mode is set only those users are allowed to access the HTTP Proxy who belong to a corresponding group e g htt_access on the Domain Controller In the Content Filter window also the Profile Order Activation function will be displayed To give Internet access to a user he must be assigned to a spe
64. security system are Hardware e Processor Pentium II or compatible up to 100 users e Processor Pentium III or compatible above 100 users e 256 MB RAM e 8 GB IDE or SCSI hard drive e Bootable IDE or SCSI CD ROM drive e 2 or more PCI Ethernet network cards e For wireless LAN access a wireless LAN PCMCIA card with the Prism2 Prism2 5 or Prism3 chipset or compatible Important Note The High Availability HA Wireless LAN and Virtual LAN sub systems require extra hardware Please check the Hardware Compatibility List for Novell Security Manager powered by Astaro available at http www novell com documentation nsma51 for compatibility To make Heart Beat monitoring of the High Availability HA system easier we recommend using network cards from the Hard ware Compatibility List HCL for all interfaces The installation of the HA system is described in detail in chapter on page 98 13 Installation Administration PC e Correct configuration of the Default Gateway IP Address and Subnet Mask e An HTTPS compliant browser Microsoft Explorer 5 0 or newer Netscape Communicator 6 1 or newer or Mozilla 1 6 JavaScript must be activated The browser must be configured not to use a proxy for the IP address of the security system s internal network card ethO Browser configuration is discussed in chapter on page 221 Example Configuration External Network Router Toi G 6 o Internet
65. selected The position of the entry is displayed in the left column Use the buttons in the right column to change the order of the entries Clicking on the buttons or moves the respective entry one line up and or one line down Clicking on the buttons or moves the respective entry in the first 32 Installation and or last line of the table Assigning the authentication method or interface Select the authentication method and or interface by clicking on the check box This activates the new setting and moves it into the last line of the already selected entries Disabling an authentication method or interface Disable an entry by clicking on the activated check box in the corresponding line The entry is immediately disabled The functions in this line will then be no longer available 3 3 4 Drop down Menus Europe Berlin Drop down menus are used to Europe Berlin configure functions that can have Bratislava Brussels only one of a few values To use Bucharest simply select the value from the Budapest Chisinau list as a rule values chosen in Copenhagen Dublin drop down menus take effect Gibraltar 5 Helsinki immediately Istanbul 33 Installation do not reph fw notify net mustermann project agency com rstriegel projektagentur com mueller projektagentur com koenig projektagentur com king project agency com king project agen
66. shown on the first page of the Reporting menus show an overview of the current day s activity By clicking the Show all button you can open a page containing graphics built from weekly monthly and yearly statistics 4 8 1 Administration LS Aanias anua The Administration menu Todsy Yesterday Lat 7Dsy Last 30 Days 5 m khada los enced T L T I contains an overview of the Remote login ucen ited ove ore oro os P Local nhs beveled oe ore evo I administrative events of the Up Tate Syrton mxcomMattod ore ore oro ore UIDs Vis Protein Geneon Lee oo oro 0 last 30 days Up 20ste intrusion Protection uccomMettod ove ore ore ore Conlig changes tots n n ACM uplas s tota 0 0 a o System restarts otey 1 HA takeover Hotel g o g o Uplink Lallower events total 0 License usage Daity Graph License usage fatty The following events will be displayed e WebAdmin Logins e Remote Logins e Local Logins e System Up2Dates e Virus Pattern Up2Dates e Intrusion Protection Pattern Up2Dates e Config Changes 317 Using the Security System e Configuration Manager Uploads e System Restarts e High Availability Takeover 4 8 2 Virus The Virus menu contains an overview of the filtered vir uses of the last 7 days The following viruses will be displayed e SMTP viruses e POP3 viruses e HTTP viruses 4 8 3 Hardware This menu shows the cur rent values r
67. standby connection select the Back up Interface configuration Uplink Failover check IP This entry field will be displayed if the Primary Interface setting has been selected for the Uplink Failover on Interface function Enter the IP address of a host here which replies to the ICMP Ping requests and which in addition to that is always reachable The security system will send ping requests to this host if no answer is received the backup interface will be enabled by the failover In this entry field there must always be an IP address for the failover QoS Status In order to use Quality of Service QoS band width management on an interface enable this option To enable Using the Security System the Quality of Service QoS function select On from the drop down menu Important Note For the bandwidth management Quality of Service QoS you must define the values for Uplink Bandwidth kbits and Downlink Bandwidth kbits These values are used as basis for the bandwidth management system incorrect values can lead to poor management of the data flow The Quality of Service QoS function is described in chapter Uplink Bandwidth kbits This setting will only appear if the QoS function is enabled In this entry menu enter the available bandwidth for the Uplink in full kilobits This value can be determined either from the values of the upstream interface or from the router On an interface to the Internet this value corr
68. that the interface is Down the system requires a short time to configure and load the settings 171 Click the Refresh button to load the menu again Further information about the Refresh function can be found in chapter on page 36 When the message Up appears the interface is fully operational The network card settings are displayed in the Parameters column The new virtual interface will appear in the Hardware Device Overview just as an additional IP address IP alias on a standard Ethernet network card would The Sys ID of this virtual interface is composed of the SysID of the network card and the number of the VLAN tag 149 Using the Security System 4 3 2 5 PPPoE DSL Connection This interface type is used to connect to the Internet over a DSL connection using the PPP over Ether net protocol The configur ation will require the DSL connection information in cluding username and pass word provided by your Internet Service Provider Note The installation and specific settings required for DSL connections is described in the DSL Network guide Also note that once the DSL connection is activated the security system will be connected to your ISP 24 hours a day You should therefore ensure that your ISP bills on a flat rate or bandwidth based system rather than based on connection time The DSL Network guide is available at http www novell com documentation nsma51 Configuring PPP over Ethernet PPPoE DSL
69. the additional status Bounce If the Content Filter has blocked an e mail which might be a Phishing Mail this will be indicated if you touch the cell with the VP message with the mouse 275 Using the Security System With Phishing Mails fraudsters lure Internet users to false websites and request the visitors to enter information on their passwords and access information on their online banking Recipient s The recipient of an e mail is displayed in this column For the SMTP type this is the recipient s address on the enveloppe For e mails with the deferred status the delivery status will be displayed separately for each recipient Deferred or permanent error The drop down menu at the bottom of the table shows further functions to manage single e mails Click the selection box next to an e mail to manage it The following functions are available Delete All chosen e mails will be deleted Force delivery All chosen e mails will be forwarded to the recipient addresses even those having a quarantined status For e mails with a deferred or permanent error status it is being tried again to deliver the message If the system encounters another problem delivering it the message will return to its previous status Download as zip file The chosen e mails are packed into a zip file and then saved to the selected local host 276 Using the Security System Global Actions In order to save disk space on the s
70. the Primary Interface Using the Security System Important Note When the Uplink Failover on Interface function is used two different networks must be defined on the Primary and Backup Interface Therefore you need two separate Internet accesses next to the additional network card Uplink Failover on Interface is by default disabled If you wish to use this network card as primary Internet connection then configure it in the Primary Interface drop down menu If this network card shall contain the standby connection select the setting Backup Interface Uplink Failover check IP This entry field will be displayed if the Primary Interface setting has been selected for the Uplink Failover on Interface function Enter the IP address of a host here e g the DNS server of your Internet Service Provider which replies to the ICMP Ping requests and which in addition to that is always reachable The security system will send ping requests to this host if no answer is received the backup interface will be enabled by the failover In this entry field there must always be an IP address for the failover QoS Status In order to use Quality of Service QoS band width management on an interface enable this option To enable the Quality of Service QoS function select On from the drop down menu Important Note For the bandwidth management Quality of Service QoS you must define the values for Uplink Bandwidth kbits and Downlink Ban
71. the data flow This also means that small manageable modules can be used for each kind of data which in turn means the system is less prone to problems due to implementation errors For example this security system includes the following proxies e An HTTP proxy with Java JavaScript and Activex e An SMTP proxy which scans e mails for viruses and controls e mail distribution e A SOCKS proxy which acts as a generic authenticating circuit level proxy for many applications Application level gateways have the advantage of allowing the complete separation of protected and unprotected networks They ensure that no packets are allowed to move directly from one network to the other This results in reduced administration costs as proxies ensure the integrity of protocol data they can protect all of the clients and servers in your network independent of brand version or platform Protection Mechanisms Some firewalls contain further mechanisms to ensure added security 8 Installation One such mechanism is supporting the use of private IP addresses in protected networks through Network Address Translation NAT specifically e Masquerading e Source NAT SNAT e Destination NAT DNAT This allows an entire network to hide behind one or a few IP addresses and hides the internal network topology from the outside This allows internal machines to access Internet servers while making it is impossible to identify individual machines
72. the entry field enter a unique username for the local user This username will be used later for example to configure packet filter rules Allowed characters are The only allowed characters are alphanumeric characters minus space and underscore _ Names may be up to 39 characters long Password Enter a password here Security Note Use a secure password Your name spelled backwards is for example not a secure password while something like xfT35 4 would be Comment You can enter a local user description in this entry field Save the Local User by clicking on the Add Definition button The new User will then be displayed in the table In the table enable the services for the Local User At the beginning no services are enabled for the user Enable the services by clicking on the corresponding term Example HAR the HTTP Proxy is not enabled HTTP the HTTP Proxy is enabled Using the Security System The available services are HTTP Proxy SMTP Proxy SOCKS Proxy WebAdmin L2TP over IPSec and PPTP Remote Access PPTP Address In PPTP connections also a static IP address can be assigned to a remote host instead of a dynamic address from a PPTP IP pool In order to define a static IP click on the field in the PPTP Address column and enter the address in the entry field Click the Save button to save your changes In order to interrupt this process click on the Cancel button For more information on P
73. the settings by clicking Save 25 If an authentication is required for accessing the Upstream Proxy Server enable the Use Authentication function and make the following settings Username Enter a username in the entry field Password Enter the password in this entry field 26 Save the settings by clicking Save 4 1 4 Backup The Backup function allows you to save the settings of your Security system to a file on a local disk This backup file allows you to install a known good configuration on a new or misconfigured security system This is especially useful in case of hardware failure as it means replacement systems can be up and running within minutes 55 Using the Security System can only load backups from nsing menu before loading the nse the system will only support circumstances this can lead to After every system change be sure to make a backup This will ensure that the most current security system settings are always available Make sure that backups are kept securely as the backup contains all of the configuration options including certificates and keys After generating a backup file you should always check it for readability It is also a good idea to use an external MD5 program to generate checksums this will allow you to check the integrity of the backup later Restore a Backup This window allows you to install the backup file of the configuration Loading a Backup 1 Open the Backup menu in t
74. uses public keys and private keys An X 509 certificate contains the public key together with information identifying the owner of the key Such certificates are signed and issued by a trusted Certificate Authority CA During the Key Exchange process the certificates are ex changed and authenticated using a locally stored CA certificate Further information on Certificate Authorities CAs can be found in chapter on page 95 and in chapter on page 309 4 7 1 Connections 288 Using the Security System The Connections menu allows you to configure local settings for new IPSec VPN tunnels and to manage existing connections This section allows you to enable or disable the IPSec VPN system by clicking the Enable Dis able button next to Status IKE Debugging This Endpolot Defiaiticn function allows you to niches eee check the IPSec connec tion Detailed information Wi l is logged to the IPSec SER gt logs These protocols can PERE ETE be displayed in real time Xen aes in the Local Log Browse menu or downloaded to your local computer Further information on the Local Logs menu can be found in chapter on page 326 Remote Endpoint Submet definition options The IKE Debugging function requires a large amount of system resources and can slow the IPSec VPN connection building process down considerably This system should only be enabled when IKE is actively being debugged
75. warrior with dynamic IP address An IPSec remote key object is defined by three parameters e The IKE authentication method PSK RSA X 509 e The IPSec ID of the remote endpoint IP Hostname E Mail Ad dress Certificate e The authentication data Shared secret for PSK public key for RSA X 509 certificate New Remote IPSec Key Every IPSec remote endpoint must have an associated IPSec remote key object defined The new Remote Key objects are defined in the Remote IPSec Key window Defining IPSec Remote Keys 1Under the IPSec VPN tab open the Remote Keys menu The New Remote IPSec Key will be displayed 301 Inthe Name field enter a name for the new Remote Key If you wish to use the IPSec Remote Key for a standard con nection continue with step Virtual IP optional This function allows you to assign a virtual IP address to the road warrior This is the only way to manually set IP addresses for such connections If you enter an 304 302 Using the Security System IP address here it must also be configured on the road warrior system Attention With a road warrior IPSec tunnel the Virtual IP function must be enabled if you wish to use the NAT Traversal function and the L2TP Encapsulation function is disabled The IP address entered here should not be used anywhere else and cannot be a part of a directly connected network Use the Key type drop down menu to select the IKE authentication method
76. you are using 1 Microsoft Active Directory Microsoft Active Directory can use either the User Principal Name UPN or the full Distinguished Name DN of the user Examples UPN admin example com DN cn administrator cn users dc example dc com 2 Novell eDirectory Enter the full Distinguished Name DN of the user Example DN cn administrator o our_organisation 3 OpenLDAP OpenLDAP and OpenLDAP conforming servers can only use the Distinguished Name DN of users Base DN Enter the object name to be used as the basis for all client actions Examples For MS Active Directory dc example dc com For Novel eDirectory o our_organisation 89 Using the Security System 94 Enter the password in the Password entry field This password should also be used for the Administration of the Stand alone LDAP Server Security Note Use a secure password Your name spelled backwards is for example not a secure password while something like xfT35 4 would be 95 Click the Save button to save these settings Security Note As long as the LDAP authentication by attribute function is disabled all users who are listed in the directory with a unique DN and a valid password can use the HTTP SMTP and SOCKS proxies and can also access the WebAdmin tool Advanced Authentication with LDAP 1Enable the LDAP authentication by attribute function by clicking Enable next to Status 2Use the Service drop down menu to sele
77. 0 G00 _ vax wfe syacall pl weerun 25894 0 0 0 2 2556 7207 R 10 00 0 00 inps aunt wwwrun 25623 0 0 1 0 5448 2584 7 S 09 52 0 00 _ use sbin arepa ere mrepa rost 456 0 0 0 7 5716 1952 gt S Ape l 6 03 usr local bin alied L syslog lt root 709 0 9 3 1 10424 8060 7 S Apel 65 38 ust local bin sel face pl ror 720 00 Q0 7260 2168 7 S Apo 0 00 Var eua eua bin ete vte ocat us gt i Mecrosalt Internet Daplorer jlomain co n Interface Information a Link emeap Ethernet Moir 00 0C 68 86 23 73 imet OS8c 192 168 5 217 Beast 192 168 5255 Mask 255 255 255 0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST WTU 1500 Metric RX packets 7108 exrors 0 dropped overruns 0 frase 0 DyvesiGS49452 6 2 Mb TX bytes l0646106 17 7 Mb 0000 PX Intern t 5 Base ad ress 0x S04 59 errors 0 dropped 0 ewercuns 0 carrier tagaruelen FX bytes G46501097 616 6 Mb TX byceni646S01097 616 6 T 324 This menu offers additional system information This in formation will be displayed in a separate window Click ing on the Show button opens this window Disk Partition This table lists the disk partitions on the system and their usage levels Process list This tree lists all current processes on the Internet security system Interface Information All configured internal and ex ternal network cards are listed here Using the Security System ARP Table This table displays the current ARP cache of the syst
78. 1234 123 4 5 6 ll Vv This message shows that 23 data packets have been sent from network 192 168 105 0 24 to network 192 168 104 0 24 The tunnel s ID number is 0x1234 and the remote endpoint is has IP address 123 4 5 6 Configuring an IPSec Connection 1Under the IPSec VPN tab open the Connections menu 2Enable the option by clicking the Enable in the Global IPSec Settings window The New IPSec Connection window will open 285 In the Name field enter a descriptive name for the new IPSec VPN connection Name Enter a descriptive name for this IPSec VPN tunnel Allowed characters are Only alphanumeric and underscore characters are allowed Type Choose the type of connection to use Use Standard for Net to Net connections The Road Warrior Road Warrior CA and MS Windows L2TP IPSec connection types are useful with HOST to NET con nections e g for sales representatives The telecommuter will then be able to build an IPSec connection to the firm s internal network A road warrior connection can only be used through a default gateway 291 Using the Security System warrior connection This can serve to reduce configuration hassles It must be respected however that all road warriors use the same type of authentication PSK RSA or X 509 a mixed operation can result in malfunctions Note Multiple remote key objects can be added to a single road I Further configuration parameters can be set for the chosen
79. 1Open the Networks menu in the Definitions tab 2In the Name entry field enter a distinct Name Allowed characters are Letters of the alphabet digits from O to 9 hyphen space and underscore characters The name must be fewer than 39 characters long 10 Now enter the IP Address of the NTP Server 11 In the Subnet Mask entry field enter the network mask 255 255 255 255 12 Now confirm your settings by clicking on the Add button WebAdmin will now check your entries for semantic validity Once accepted the new network will appear in the network table 13 Open the Settings menu in the System tab 42 Using the Security System 14 In the Time Settings window make the following settings in the given order Time Zone Now select the time zone Use NTP Server Select the NTP Server here The system clock of the Internet Security system will be synchronized with the external NTP server every hour SSH Shell Access Settings Secure Shell SSH is a text based access mode for the security system intended only for advanced administrators In order to access this shell you will need an SSH Client which comes standard with most Linux distributions For MS Windows we recommend Putty as SSH Client Access through SSH is encrypted and cannot be read by eavesdroppers The Shell Access function is enabled by default once you have entered a password for the configuration through the Configuration Manager in the Setting
80. 32 Using the Security System A https 192 168 5 217 index fpl7frameset active Microsoft Interne TEPE E1 Open the access control list is is an example for a commen soe 7 Cae stae l by clicking on the field with the entry e g O entries Enter the Internet addresses one beneath the other into the entry field e g www corporation org Comments must be identified with a sign at the beginning of each line Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an entry click cancel URL Blacklist This is an additional function of the Surf Protection Categories With this access control list you can forbid the access to specific Websites with a content that doesn t match the subjects in the Surf Protection Categories Ei Cancel Save Open the access control list by clicking on the field with the entry e g O entries Enter the Internet addresses one beneath the other Comments must be identified with a sign at the beginning of each line Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an entry click cancel Surf Protection Categories In this field choose the kinds of websites to which access should not be allowed Open the access control list by clicking on the field with the entry e g O entries The Surf Protection option contains 17 defined Surf Protection Categories Those 17 categories are administered and edited in the same table The administration of the S
81. 34 The Functions Profile Assignment Total 1 entries Add blank Assignment Profile Name Assigned local Users Assigned Network Blocks 1 BD Example none PPTP Pool Web_Server Address Wieb_Server Broadcast Web_Server Network E Hold CTRL for multiselect deselect Save Cancel The following picture shows a Profile assignment The functions from the left to the right are Deleting Profile assignments 8 Click the trash can icon to de lete an assignment from the table Position number The workout sequence will be displayed in the table through the respective Position number Clicking on the field with the entry will open the drop down menu This drop down menu allows you to change the order of the profile assignments Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an entry click cancel Status light The status light refers to the status of the profile assignment Each new assignment is not yet enabled status light is red The profile assignment will be enabled by clicking on the status light status light is green Profile Name Select the Surf Protection Profile in this field from the Profiles Table Clicking on the field with the entry opens the drop down menu Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an entry click cancel 238 Using the Security System Assigned local Users Select the local user from this field Clicking on this field with the entry opens the sele
82. 76 Enable the interface by clicking the status light The interface is now enabled status light shows green The Oper column will at first show that the interface is Down the system requires a short time to configure and load the settings 177 Click the Refresh button to load the menu again Further information about the Refresh function can be found in chapter on page 36 When the message Up appears the interface is fully operational The network card settings are displayed in the Parameters column 154 Using the Security System 4 3 2 6 PPTPoE PPPoA DSL Connections This type of interface is re quired for DSL connections using the PPP over ATM protocol To configure such a connection you will need an unused Ethernet interface on the security system as well as an ADSL modem with an Ethernet port The connection to the Internet proceeds through two separate connections see DSL Modem graphic Between the security system EJ PPPoA and the ADSL modem a connection using Modem IP address the PPTP over Ethernet protocol is established The ADSL modem is in turn connected to the ISP using the PPP over etha ATM dialing protocol The configuration will require the DSL connection information including user name and password provided by your VCSEL Internet Service Provider Address ethO 192 168 2 100 Example Address ethi NIC IP Address PPTPoE The installation and specific settings required
83. A AnA A AOA A Ao A A OO OA AO A OA Ao AOA x e A OA mw A BAA w M KWAA O AOA AW DODOA OAA OA A OAA OA Apio A A ODADA 8A AAGO A AS AMAA BA om A A AOA WA OAS ABDAA Ox OA gt A A OA k A AN O A DAA OAV AADA OMA OwA OA A OF OAM OAM OA OAA OAM ODA OAL A OA OA DA W AeA WwW OA A OD A o oOo OA 3 AAD A OA OA I A Aw OA A BAA OA A jA At 7 O 6O 6OOOR yAO O 4 AO A A a oO A A BW Syd Uk xv x x tii x v w x x w ga O wE w ES 9 a iil sd mA AA LWA weds x A x XO 2 x x 7k ie x a Lily Leal x Of Lily LNW HA xe v A Bk v v HA u 7 Bi Je E A Fp a R oe E pain N54 x VEN LY vv wei LL x v pi v x 7 F 3 B amp B RR H dina SS ae LN LN i wy x v iA v v ee Low A LNW i Lily xv xy ik Wry LLNS LWA x Of QW We Using the Security System 76 77 78 79 80 81 Example John Smith in the Trainees directory Left click the Properties button A window named Properties will open In the Properties window select Member Of tab Click Add to add the new group The Select Groups window will open Now choose the Security Group you wish to add the user to Example socks_users Save your changes by clicking OK The new Security Group will be added in the Member Of window Save your settings by clicking OK Now execute the settings on the Internet security system The settings in the configuration tool WebAdmin are explained on page 88 Microsoft Active Directory self defined attribut
84. A Manage ment menu allows you to create and manage your own X 509 Certificate Authority CA The authority will verify the validity of X 509 certificates exchanged during IPSec VPN connections The relevant information is stored in the X 509 certficates But you can also use certificates signed by commercial providers such as VeriSign Note Every certificate has unique CA with respect to its identifying information Name Firm Location etc If the first certificate is lost a second cannot be generated to replace it The CA Management menu allows you to manage three distinct kinds of certificates which are used for different purposes The three certificates differentiate themselves according to use and import antly whether or not the Private Key is stored CA Certificate Authority Certificate If a CA is saved without private key it can be used for the authentication of the host and user certificate of incoming IPSec connections this type of CA is called a Verification CA If a CA saves its private key it can be used to sign certificate queries in order to produce a valid certificate This CA is called a Signing CA The system can contain a number of Verification CAs but only one Signing CA Host CSR Certificate Signing Request This is a request to have a certain certificate signed When it is given to a Signing CA and the CA verifies the identity of the owner the CA sends back a fully formed and signed Host C
85. BOES 168bt MOS 160b DH Group 5 MOOP1536 Pa OF MOS 160bit D PFS Group 5 MODPIS35 of e Manual Key Exchange e Internet Key Exchange IKE Using the Security System In the Policies menu you can customize parameters for IPSec connections and collect them into a policy Policies are used to define IPSec connections and contain the configuration of the selected key ex change method IKE and the IPSec connection The chosen key exchange method defines how the keys for the connection are to be managed The two exchange Because of the complexity of manual exchange this system only supports the IKE key exchange method Manual exchange is not allowed 297 Using the Security System Configuring an IPSec Policy 1Under the IPSec VPN tab open the Policies menu 2Click New to open the New IPSec Policy menu 294 Inthe Name field enter a name for the new policy Name Enter a name describing the policy It may be useful to include the encryption algorithm in the name The name can also be defined as the last step in creating the policy Key Exchange Only IKE is supported 295 In the ISAKMP IKE Settings window configure the settings for IKE IKE Mode The IKE mode is used to support key exchange At the moment only the Main Mode is supported Encryption Algorithm The encryption algorithm is the algo rithm used to encrypt IKE connections The IPSec VPN fu
86. ET any gt HOME_NET any Filter Enter the real identification parameter for the IPS rule in Snort syntax in the entry field Please make sure that the entry ends with a sign Example dsize gt 800 227 Save your configuration by clicking Add local Rule The new IPS rule is always locally imported to an IPS set of rules The rule is immediately enabled status light shows green B Ge P info 0 Informational messages B Gar locat 0 Locally generated rules 0 Miscellaneous rules Group Hits Info BB he local 0 Locally generated rules f local o B example 1D 10000 Ga local o B example ID 10001 196 Using the Security System 4 4 3 Advanced This menu allows you to configure additional settings for the Intrusion Protec tion System IPS This should however only be done by experienced users Policy and Exclusions Policy From this drop down menu select the security policy that the Intrusion Protection System should use if a blocking rule detects an IPS attack signature e Drop silently the data packet will only be blocked e Terminate connection a TCP Reset and or ICMP Unreachable for UDP packet will be sent to both communication partners and the connection will be terminated IPS Network Exclusions Specific connections between the net works of the Intrusion Protection System IPS can be excluded in this selection menu The connections will
87. Further options are available depending on the chosen Key type PSK The firewall only supports using IPv4 Addresses as VPN Identifiers during the key exchange phase of IKE Main Mode Enter the shared password in the Preshared Key field If you wish to configure many road warrior connections you only need one PSK for all connections Security Note Use a secure password Your name spelled backwards is for example not a secure password while something like xfT35 4 would be Make certain that this password does not fall into the wrong hands With this password an attacker can build a VPN connection to the internal network We recommend changing this password at regular intervals RSA The key pair consists of a private key and a public key In order for the endpoints to communicate they must exchange their public keys Public keys can be exchanged via e mail In the VPN Identifier drop down menu choose the VPN ID type of the endpoint If you select E Mail Address Full qualified domain name or IP Address you must enter the address or name in the entry field below 305 Using the Security System 303 X509 Use the VPN Identifier drop down menu to select the kind of VPN ID to use If you select E Mail Address Full qualified domain name or IP Address you must enter the address or name in the entry field below In order to use a Distinguished Name as an ID you will need the following information from the X 509 index Coun
88. ISM frequencies have been specifically allocated for unlicensed communication by industrial scientific and medical organizations and are thus available for cost free private use The IEEE 802 11b standard allows for a maximum bandwidth of 11 Mbit s When planning your network design however please note that bandwidth actually available will be smaller when the distances between nodes are large In order to configure a Wireless LAN you will need a PCMCIA card I with a Prism2 Prism2 5 or Prism3 compatible chipset The hard ware supported by the security system is listed in the Hardware Compatibility List for Novell Security Manager powered by Astaro available at http www novell com documentation nsma51 Important Note The wireless LAN interface on the security system can be configured either as a Wireless LAN Access Point or a Wireless LAN Station The Wireless LAN Access Point mode connects wireless nodes with one another its function is analogous to that of a hub in a traditional wired network Wireless nodes can also communicate with the wired LAN through the security system In the Wireless LAN Station mode the security system functions as a normal node on an existing wireless network Only in this mode can the system acquire an IP address through DHOP 135 Using the Security System Wireless LAN Security The 802 11 standard includes the WEP standard for encrypting radio communications WEP stands for Wired Equiva
89. Important Note 289 Using the Security System IPSec Connections In the IPSec Connections table all current VPN connections are listed IPSec System Information VPN Status In the VPN cs Status window status in formation is shown for ac tive encryption algorithms all active IPSec connections and detailed information about every Security Association SA VPN Routes The VPN Routes window shows all active IPSec SA connections If no entries exist here no IPSec connections are active Routing entries follow the following form AB gt C gt D 3 192 168 105 0 24 gt 192 168 104 0 24 gt Shold 8 192 168 105 0 24 gt 192 168 110 0 24 gt Strap O 192 168 105 0 24 gt 192 168 130 0 24 gt tun0x133a 233 23 43 1 Column A The number of packets in this VPN connection Column B The local subnet or host Column C The remote subnet or host Column D The status of the connection trap The connection is idle and is waiting for a packet The status initiates the end of the VPN connection hold The connection is being negotiated All packets will wait until the VPN tunnel is established UP tun0x133a 233 23 43 1 Messages like these show that the tunnel is up A VPN tunnel with ID 0x133a has been established and the IP address of the Remote Endpoint is 233 23 43 1 290 Using the Security System Example AB gt C gt D 23 192 168 105 0 24 gt 192 168 104 0 24 tun0x
90. Log function has been enabled under Packet Filter Rules Current System Packet Filter Rules The Current Packet Filter rules window provides detailed information for expert administrators The table shows all rules in real time including system generated ones and is taken directly from the operating system kernel Current System NAT Rules As with the current filter rules Current NAT rules displays all user and system defined NAT rules Connection Tracking Table This menu shows a list of all current connections and the connection parameters 219 Using the Security System 4 6 Application Gateways Proxies While a Packet Filter filters packets at the network level Proxies also called Application Gateways offer control and security at the application level by preventing a direct connection between client and server Each Proxy can also provide further security services for its service Since each proxy knows the context of its service extensive security and protocol options are being offered This intensive protocol analysis is made possible by well defined and well supported protocol standards The proxies concentrate on the most essential information In the Proxies tab select the Proxies with the same name and configure the settings By default all proxies are disabled This security system contains proxies for HTTP Web DNS Name server SOCKS point to point connections POP3 SMTP e mail and Ident 220 Using
91. Novell Security Manager Powered by Astaro USER GUIDE February 25 2005 Novell Legal Notices Novell Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents or use of this documentation and specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Further Novell Inc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes to its content at any time without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revisions or changes Further Novell Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to any software and specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Further Novell Inc reserves the right to make changes to any and all parts of Novell software at any time without any obligation to notify any person or entity of such changes You may not use export or re export this product in violation of any applicable laws or regulations including without limitation U S export regulations or the laws of the country in which you reside Copyright 2005 Novell Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced photocopied stored on a retrieval system or transmitted without the express written consent of the publisher Novell Inc may have intellectual property rights relating to technology embodied in the product that is described in this docum
92. PTP VPN Access please refer to chapter on page 180 Filters paced User Derren cada The Filters function allows me you to filter Users with spe cific attributes from the table This function considerably enhances the management of huge network configurations as users of a certain type can be presented in a concise way Filtering users 1Click on the Filters button The entry window will open 125 Enter the filter attributes in the fields listed You don t have to define all attributes Username If you want to filter the users by username enter the expression in the entry field Comment If you want to filter users by specific comments enter the expressions in this entry field 126 To start the filter click on the Apply Filters button 119 Using the Security System Only the filtered users will be displayed in the table Next time when you open the menu the complete user table will be displayed Further Functions Editing Local Users Click on the settings in the Name Password PPTP Address and Comment columns in order to open an editing window You can then edit the entries Deleting Local Users Clicking on the symbol of the trash can will delete the definition from the table 120 Using the Security System 4 3 Network Settings Network The Network tab contains menus which allow you to configure net work cards and virtual interfaces as well as to perform network specific configuration and manag
93. Ping Settings This window contains con figuration options specific to ICMP Ping Further information about Ping can be found in chapter on page 188 Firewall is ping visible When this function is enabled the firewall will respond to Ping packets Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green Firewall forwards Ping When this function is enabled the firewall will forward Ping packets Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green Ping from Firewall The Ping command can be used on the firewall Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green 4 5 3 Advanced Connection Tracking Helpers The Stateful Inspection Packet Filter and the NAT function are provided by the iptables module in the Net filter sub system All connections operated with the packet filter will be tracked by the Conntrack module this is referred to as Con nection Tracking Some protocols such as FTP or IRC require several communication channels which cannot be connected through port numbers In order to use these protocols with the Packet filter or to replace an address through NAT the Connection Tracking Helpers are required Helpers are structures referring to so called Conntrack Helpers 214 Using the Security System Generally speaking these are additional Kernel modules that help the Conntrack module to recognize existing connections For FTP dat
94. Security System Configuring Static Mappings This function allows you to ensure that specific computers are always assigned the same IP address To configure this function you will need to know the MAC hardware address of the client s network card Determining the MAC addresses of network cards is described on page 138 1In the Network tab open the DHCP Server menu 2In the Static Mappings window make the following settings MAC Address In the MAC Address entry field enter the MAC address of the network card The MAC address must be entered as in the following example Example 00 04 76 16 EA 62 IP Address Enter the IP address into this entry field The address must be within the range specified by the Range Start and Range End options 211 Save the settings by clicking Add The static address mapping will appear in the Static Mapping Table To remove an entry from this table click delete 178 Using the Security System Current IP Leasing Table The Current IP Leasing table shows all current IP address map pings If more than one entry is shown for the same IP address only the last listed one is valid This table will only be shown when there are entries in it 179 Using the Security System 4 3 6 PPTP VPN Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP allows single Internet based hosts to access internal network services through an encrypted tunnel PPTP is easy to set up and requires on Microsoft Windows syst
95. Server To make this work the Backend Mail Server must reject e mails to unknown receiver addresses on SMTP level The general rule is If the Backend Mail Server rejects a mail then the mail will also be rejected by the firewall Verify Sender This function is used to check the sender addresses of incoming e mails It is checked whether messages can really be delivered from the sender address by connecting to the host and executing a RCPT command If this is not the case the mail will be rejected Editing Domain Profiles 1To add a new Blank Profile to the table click on the New Profile button Then you can edit the Profile line 271 For incoming e mails select the group from Domain Groups table in the Domain Groups field Open the selection window by clicking on the message e g empty 272 Inthe Route Target field set the route for incoming mails Open the selection window by clicking on the message e g use MX records All e mails for this domain group must be forwarded to a specific host This will normally be a host like Microsoft Exchange Server or Lotus Notes Prior to that the host must be defined 258 Using the Security System in the Definitions Networks You can also set the system to forward e mails to the system specified by the MX record You should take care that the IP address of the firewall itself is not the primary MX Record Use MX records host for the domain because it will not send e mails to i
96. System Passwords window If you wish to access the security system through SSH the SSH Status light must be enabled status light shows green The SSH protocol uses name resolution valid name server if no valid name servers are found SSH access attempts will time out The time out takes about a minute During which time the connection seems to be frozen or failed Once the time out has expired the con nection process continues without further delay You must also add the networks allowed to access the SSH service in the Allowed Networks selection field In order to ensure a seamless installation process the Allowed networks field contains the Any option by default this means that any computer can access 43 Using the Security System the SSH service Networks can be defined in the Definitions Networks menu Security Note By default anyone has access to the SSH service The Allowed Networks field contains the Any option For increased security we recommend that access to the SSH service be limited All other networks should be removed We recommend that the SSH service be disabled when not in active use Password and Factory Reset The Password Reset function allows you to set new pass words for the Security system If you log in to the WebAdmin configuration tool for the first time after this action the Setting System Passwords window will be displayed This allows you to set optional passwords such as
97. The Content Filter contains a Virus Protection function and filters Websites with specific technical components 231 Using the Security System The Functions The following picture shows a Surf Protection profile Profiles Total 1 entries Add blank Profile 7 Name URL Whitelist URL Blacklist Surf Protection Categories Content Removal VP The functions from the left to the right are Deleting Profiles 8 Click on the trashcan icon to delete a profile from the table Name This is the name of the Surf Protection Profile This Name is necessary to assign this profile to a specific Network or User Open the editing window by clicking on the field with the entry e g Default Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an entry click cancel URL Whitelist This is an additional function from the Surf Pro tection Categories With this access control list you can allow the access to specific Websites with a content that matches the subjects in the Surf Protection Categories Profiles Total 1 entries Add blank Profile 7 Name URL Whitelist URL Blacklist Surf Protection Categories Content Removal VP 8 Example 0 siih a 0 entries e Information_and_Communication lt gt 0 entries Q Example If you have chosen the Information and Communi cation subject in the Surf Protection Categories menu but wish to explicitly allow access to a specific information website simply add this address to the Whitelist 2
98. Under Active Directory Schema right click Attribute 2Use the left mouse button to click New 3In the Create New Attribute window define the new attribute Common Name Enter a CN for this attribute LDAP Display Name Give the new attribute a clear label The name of the service this attribute controls would be a good choice Example Socks Unique X500 Object ID Enter the OID for this attribute in the entry field Syntax Choose Boolean Minimum Leave this field blank Maximum Leave this field blank 84 Save your settings by clicking OK 84 Using the Security System Step 3 Allocate a Class for the Attribute 1Under Active Directory Schema left click Classes 2Right click Users A window named User Properties will open 85 Click the Attributes tab and make the following settings Optional Use the drop down menu to select the attribute and click Add 86 Save your settings by clicking OK 87 In the Microsoft Management Console right click Active Directory Schema 88 With the left mouse button click Reload the Schema Step 4 Setting the Attribute for Users 1In the ADSI Edit window right click the user to edit Example John Smith in the Trainees directory 89 Left click the Properties button A window named Properties will open 90 In the Properties window click the Attributes tab 91 Select which properties to view Choose Both 92 Select a property to view Choose the attribute to set Exampl
99. Username In the entry field enter the username Password In the entry field enter the password 128 Save your settings by clicking on the Save button 4 3 2 Interfaces 122 Using the Security System Sohail PAE A firewall requires at least rr gt a Routes two network cards in i _ S order to securely connect an Internet internal network LAN to an external one the Internet OR RA In our examples the Net Internal Network bo gt A work card ethO is always n the interface connected to the internal network Net gt Firewall work card ethi is the web IPE mall Network card 2 ent interface connected to the Server Server Server Network card 3 eth2 external network e g to the Internet These interfaces are also called the trusted and untrusted interfaces respectively Network cards are automatically recognized during the installation if new network cards are added later a new installation will be necessary In order to re install the system simply make a backup of your configuration install a new copy of the software and re load your backed up configuration Internet As is shown in the graphic at left the firewall must be the only point of contact between internal networks and external ones All data must pass through the security system We strongly recommend against connecting both internal and external interfaces to one hub or switch except i
100. You can setup a failover on an interface to the Internet with the help of a second Internet access and an additional network card Please remember in doing so that the Internet security system supports only one DSL connection A failover for the Internet access can for example consist of a permanent communication 151 Using the Security System 152 line and a DSL access If the primary connection fails the Uplink will automatically be performed by the second Internet con nection In order to monitor the connection the primary network card sends four ping requests to the Uplink Failover check IP every five seconds Only if all four ping requests are not replied to the Backup Interface is loaded When the Internet connection is established via the Backup Interface the ping requests are still sent by the Primary Inter face As soon as the security system receives the corresponding reply packages again the Internet connection is again estab lished by the Primary Interface Important Note When the Uplink Failover on Interface function is used two different networks must be defined on the Primary and Backup Interface Therefore you need next to the additional network card for the Backup Interface two separate Internet accesses Uplink Failover on Interface is by default disabled Off If you wish to use this virtual interface as primary connection select Primary Interface from the drop down menu If this interface shall contain the
101. a connections a FTP Conntrack helper for example is necessary It recognizes the data connections belonging to the control connection normally TCP Port 21 which can have any destination port and adds the respective expect structures to the expect list The following protocols are supported By default all Helper modules are loaded e FTP e H323 e IRC for DCC e MMS Microsoft Media Streaming e PPTP Loading Helper Modules By default all Helper modules are loaded The helper modules are loaded and deleted in the selection field A description of how to use the selection fields can be found in chapter on page 31 SYN Rate Limiter SYN Rate Limiter Denial of Service attacks DoS on servers shall deny the service access to legitimate users In the simplest case the attacker overloads the server with useless packets to overload its performance Since a large bandwidth is required for such attacks more and more attackers start using so called SYN Flood attacks which don t aim at overloading the bandwidth but at blocking the system resources For this purpose they send so called SYN packets to the TCP port of the service i e in a web server to Port 80 eu 215 Using the Security System The SYN Rate Limiter function reduces the number of SYN packets sent to the local network This is disabled by default status light shows red Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green
102. a integrity through data authentication e Sender authentication through PSK RSA or X 509 certificates The security features can be combined as desired Most adminis trators use at least the encryption and authentication components There are a few scenarios where IPSec VPNs can be used 281 Using the Security System 1 Net to Net Connection Office New York Office Berlin LAN Internet R AN Firewall aema encry pred unencrypted In this scenario one network communicates with another Two remote offices can use a VPN tunnel to communicate with each other as though they were on a single network This kind of connection can also be used to allow trusted third com panies e g consultants and partner firms access to internal resources Using the Security System 2 Host to Net Connection Host Office Berlin Internet LAN _ ere aaans Laptop field representative NN Firewall eaaa encnry pred unencrypted In this scenario a single computer communicates with a network Telecommuters can use VPN to communicate with the main office securely 3 Host to Host Connection Host Host Internet OR E MF Sat SS X encrypted In this scenario one computer communicates with another computer 283 Using the Security System Two computers can use a VPN tunnel to communicate securely over an untrusted network
103. able have not yet been installed yet If you are using the HA system unapplied updates will be listed in the Unapplied Up2Dates Master window Loading System Up2Dates from a local disk The filename of an Up2Date update consists of the version number tar to signify it is an encrypted archive file and the file extension gpg 1 Open the Up2Date Service menu in the System tab 2 In the System Up2Date window click on the Browse button next to Import from File 17 In the File Upload window choose the Up2Date packages you would like to load and click on the Open button When using Microsoft Windows make sure not to use a UNC Important Note Path Instead choose the updates by using the Look in option I 18 In the System Up2Date window next to Import from File click Start Successfully loaded updates will appear in the Unapplied Up2Dates window with the version number and the file name Further information is available by clicking the Info button Note that the Unapplied Up2Dates in the table have not yet been installed yet If you are using the HA system unapplied updates will be listed in the Unapplied Up2Dates Master window 19 Repeat steps 2 through 4 until all Up2Date packages have been imported 51 Using the Security System Installing System Up2Dates without the HA solution 1 Open the Up2Date Service menu in the System tab 2 In the Unapplied Up2Dates table choose the Up2Date updates to install
104. again After system 1 completes the boot process the Num Lock light will stop blinking and the system will beep five times in second cycles this signals that the middleware has successfully loaded and initialized all services rules and processes Note If the beeps are not heard and the LED light continues to blink the middleware was unable to initialize all services rules and processes If this happens please contact the service depart ment of your security solution supplier 29 Configuring System 2 Hot Standby Mode 103 Using the Security System Start system 2 and also execute step on system 2 and then click the Save button to confirm System 2 will now restart If a keyboard is connected the Num Lock LED will blink When the system reaches the Hot Standby mode the system will beep twice and the LED will stop blinking System 2 recognizes system 1 through the data transfer connection and remains in Hot Standby Mode Das High Availability system is now active The Internet security system in the Hot Standby mode will be up dated at regular intervals over the data transfer connection Should the active system encounter an error the second system will immedi ately and automatically change to normal mode and take over the system s functions 104 Using the Security System 4 1 11 Shut down Restart Restart will shut the system down completely and reboot Depending on your hardware and configuration a comp
105. age e Information on the function or texts of the Online help with the expression searched for Glossary The glossary explains the concepts and terms used in WebAdmin Click a term to see a short explanation 358 Using the Security System 4 12 Exiting the Security System If you close a browser running a WebAdmin session without using the Exit function the session will remain active until the timeout is reached sA anaaga ia te sata In such a case you can again log in to WebAdmin A screen will be displayed informing you that already another user is logged in To log in again first end the other session by clicking the Kick button If you wish to end another administrator s active session you can type a message in the Type reason here field which will be transmitted to the other administrator 359 Glossary Glossary Broadcast The address used by a computer to send a message to all other computers on the network at the same time Example A network with IP address 192 168 2 0 and network mask 255 255 255 0 would have a broadcast address of 192 168 2 255 Client A client is a program that communicates over a network with a server in order to make use of a particular service Example Netscape is a WWW client and communicates with a WWW server to download web pages Client Server model Applications based on the client server model use a client program on the user s computer to communicate with a ce
106. age 199 1In the Network tab open the NAT Masquerading menu 2In the Name field enter a descriptive name for this Masquerading Rule 198 Use the Rule Type drop down menu to select Masquerading A window named Properties will open 199 Use the Network drop down menu to select a network 200 Use the Interface drop down menu to select an interface 201 Save the settings by clicking Add After a masquerading rule has been defined and added it will appear in the NAT Rules table The further functions in the NAT table can now be used for further customization Further Functions Edit Masquerading rules Click edit to load the rule into the Edit NAT Rule window The rule can now be changed as desired Deleting Masquerading rules Click delete to remove a rule from the list 4 3 4 3 Load Balancing 173 Using the Security System The Load Balancing func tion allows you to balance incoming connections e g SMTP or HTTP sessions across different servers behind the security system Example In the enter prise s DMZ sit two iden tical HTTP servers with IP addresses 192 168 66 10 and 192 168 66 20 Load Balancing can split incoming HTTP requests between the two servers evenly Before the load balancing rule can be defined the two HTTP servers must be defined as networks consisting of single hosts in the Definitions Networks menu Next add both to a single network group The procedures for adding netw
107. als in sec onds in which WebAdmin automatically logs you out if there are no actions By default the system is set to 300 seconds after the instal lation The smallest possible interval amounts to 60 seconds Click the Save button to save these settings If you close your browser with an open WebAdmin session without closing WebAdmin through Exit the last session remains active until the end of the time out TCP Port If you want to use the standard port 443 for the HTTPS service for another purpose such as a deviation with DNAT you must enter another TCP Port for the WebAdmin Interface here Possible values are 1024 65535 while certain ports are reserved for other services In order to address WebAdmin after a modification you must separately link the port through a colon to the IP address of the Internet security system e g https 192 168 0 1 1443 92 Using the Security System Access and Authentication Allowed Networks Add those networks to the se lection field that are au thorised to access Web Admin As with SSH Any is entered here for a smooth installation In this case and if the password is available WebAdmin can be accessed from everywhere As soon as you can limit the access to the Internet security I administration for example your IP address in the local network re place the Any entry in the Allowed Networks selection field through a smaller network Security Note T
108. am The added Multiline Header contains a readable and accessible anti spam report e X Infected This header is added if a virus is detected within the message The value of the header is the name of the virus found e X Contains File The File Extension Filter is enabled and a mail contains an attachment with a potentially dangerous extension is found the proxy will add this header e X Regex Match When the Expression Filter is enabled and an e mail contains a sequence of characters from the control list Creating rules in Microsoft Outlook 2000 MS Outlook allows you to sort those e mails which had been filtered and subsequently been allowed to pass through the Firewall provided that the Pass function in the Action drop down menu of the cor responding modules on the Firewall has been selected 1Start MS Outlook 268 Using the Security System 274 Click on Inbox 275 Open the menu Tools Rules Wizard 276 Click on the button New The Rules Wizard opens in order to set new rules The Rules wizard now leads you step by step through the configuration 277 Which type of rule do you want to create step 1 Select the rule Check messages when they arrive Then click on the button Next 278 Which condition s do you want to check step 2 In this window select the condition with specific words in the message header In the window Rule description click on the underlined portion of text and type the header s name into the
109. ame servers If you or your ISP runs a name server that is closer you should enter its IP address here This means however that they are usually slower than closer name servers The ROOT name servers are an integral part of the Internet 15 ROOT name servers are distributed worldwide and are the basic instance for all secondary name servers 241 Using the Security System Tip Even if you do not plan to use the DNS proxy you should enter the address of your provider s DNS server address as a forwarding server Those will be used by the firewall itself even if the proxy is disabled This contributes to the discharge of the root name server and the firewall produces only local queries which generally receive faster replies Configuring the DNS Proxy 1In the Proxies tab open the DNS menu 2Click the Enable button to start the proxy 260 242 Another entry window will open Make the following settings A description of how to use the selection field tool can be found in chapter on page 31 Interfaces to listen on Select which network cards the DNS proxy server should be reachable on This should usually only be the internal network cards Network cards are configured in the Network Interfaces menu Further information is available in chapter on page 122 Allowed Networks Select which networks should have access to the proxy server Security Note In the Allowed networks menu do not select Any unless
110. and virtual interfaces The table lists all interfaces which have already been configured The graphic at left shows the Interfaces menu after three Ethernet network During the installation you will have configured the ethO interface This interface is the connection between the security system and the 124 Using the Security System internal network LAN By default this network card is named Internal The table displays all of the most important information about the interfaces the administrative status enabled disabled indicated by a green or red status light current connection status Up Down Name Name ID Sys ID network card type eth wlan as well as IP address and network mask Parameters Click the status light in the Admin column to administratively enable or disable the interface The functions in the Actions column allow you to edit the configuration of the interface or to delete it entirely With this Internet security system you assign one Name and also a specific network card to one virtual interface Three logical networks will then be defined for each configured interface e An interface NAME Address consisting of the defined IP address and the network mask 255 255 255 255 Host e An interface NAME Network consisting of the defined IP address and the network mask 255 255 255 255 Network e A Broadcast NAME Broadcast network consisting of the broadcast IP for this interface and th
111. ansmit further parameters for the network configuration to the clients Such as the DNS Server Addresses and the Default Gateway to be used by the clients The security system itself will usually fill both of these functions in this case you should enter the internal address of the system in these entry fields The DNS Proxy is configured in the Proxies DNS menu Please see chapter on page 241 for a description of how to use the DNS proxy NetBIOS networks can also use a WINS server for name resolution WINS stands for Windows Internet Name Service WINS servers are MS Windows NT servers with both the Microsoft TCP IP stack and the WINS server software installed These servers act as a database matching computer names with IP addresses thus allowing com puters using NetBIOS networking to take advantage of the TCP IP network 1In the Network tab open the DHCP Server menu 2In the entry fields DNS Server 1 IP and DNS Server 2 IP enter the IP address of your name servers 208 In the Gateway IP entry field enter the IP address of the default gateway 209 If you wish to assign a WINS server configure the following two settings WINS Server IP Enter the IP address of the WINS server here WINS Node Type Use the drop down menu to choose which kind of name resolution clients should use If you choose Do not set node type the client will choose by itself which to use 210 Save your configuration by clicking Save 177 Using the
112. ar deactivated at the bottom of the table status light is red Clicking on the status light enables the IPSec connection After you configure a new VPN tunnel you will need to establish the related packet filter rules to allow the two computers to communicate Configuring packet filter rules is described in chapter on page 190 295 Using the Security System Example In order to set up a Net to Net VPN connection between network 1 and network 2 you will need to define the following rules 1Under the Packet Filter tab open the Rules menu 2In the Add Rules window add the following rule for network 1 Source Network1 Service Any Destination Network 2 Action Allow 291 Confirm the entries by clicking on Add Definition 292 Inthe Add Rules window add the following rule for network 2 Source Network 2 Service Any Destination Networki Action Allow 293 Confirm the entries by clicking on Add Definition These rules will allow complete access between the two networks 296 4 7 2 WIS 3OFS_COMP IDES PFS 3OES_PFS_COMP ACM Default as AES_COMB ALS_PES ALS_PFS_COMP BLOWFISH AS DEFAULT Key Exchange Policies ISAKMP IKE Settings IKE Mode Encryption Algorithen Authentication Algorithm IKE OH Group SA Lifetime sees IPSec Settings Encryption Algorithm Enforce Algorithms Authentication Algorithm SA Lifetime secs PFS methods are Main Mode
113. arded to a specific host This will normally be a host like Microsoft Ex change Server or Lotus Notes Prior to that the host must be defined in the Definitions Networks You can also set the system to forward e mails to the system specified by the MX record You should take care that the firewall itself is not the MX host for the domain 254 Using the Security System Sender Blacklist This function allows you to create a list of sender addresses for example those of known spam senders The proxy will PIM Ix then reject all messages with f Enter one pattern per line possible patterns sre these addresses in either the head hunter com nOtheed hunter ecm From or Reply To headers Enter the address data as de scribed in the following into the control list Open the control list by clicking on the field with the message e g 0 entries Cancel Save e To block e mails from a certain address Entry user domain com e To block all e mails from a certain domain Example domain com e To block all e mails from a certain user no matter what domain is used to send the message Example user Comments must be identified with a sign at the beginning of each line Addresses starting with this sign will not be taken into consideration by the Sender Blacklist function Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an old entry click Cancel The number of patterns will then be displayed
114. ate network through the Internet Then click on the Next button 217 If you have a permanent connection to the Internet select the following option Do not dial the initial connection Then click on the Next button Otherwise select the Dial other connections first option and select your provider from the selection menu These settings can be changed later in the Properties dialog box 218 In the Destination address entry field enter the IP address of the server Then click on the Next button 219 In the Connection Availability window select whether the connection should be available to all local users or just this account Then click on the Next button 220 In the next text entry field enter a descriptive name for this PPTP connection Then click on the Next button 184 Using the Security System 221 In the Start Settings Network and Dialup Connections a right click on the new icon will allow you to open the Properties window and configure further options General This allows you to change the hostname or destination address of the connection In the Connect First window select any network connections that need to be established before setting up the PPTP session Options The dial and redial options can be defined here Security Choose the Advanced Custom Settings option Next click the Settings button Leave these settings as they are Network In the Type of VPN Server I am calling menu select the Point t
115. ategory is displayed in the Name field This name will be selected later from the Profiles Table The Subcategories field lists the subcategories 252 Now click on the entry you wish to edit Clicking on Name opens another entry window If you click on the subcategories another selection window will open All avail able subcategories will be listed in this selection field 230 Community_Education_Religion Cancel Save Using the Security System Subcategories Cities Countries Regions Government Institutions Non Government Organizations Partys Religion Sects Upbringing Education Reconnoitring Computer Criminalism Hate and Discrimination Illegal Activities Warez Sites Criminal_Activities Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an entry click cancel 253 To close the table click on the Show Hide button The Surf Protection Categories window will close The Profiles Table Each Surf Protection Profile will be displayed in the Profiles table through a separate line The different settings will either be displayed as alphanumeric signs or as symbols All settings can be edited by clicking on the correspondent field A Surf Protection Profile contains two function groups The Surf Protection Categories with the additional functions Blacklist White list and Content Removal and the Content Filter The Surf Pro tection Categories prevent the access to Websites with a specific content
116. ation as a Station is described on page 142 Configuring a Wireless LAN Access Point 1In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu 2Click on the New button The Add Interface window will open 139 Using the Security System 151 152 153 154 140 In the Name entry field enter a descriptive name for the interface Use the Hardware drop down menu to select the Wireless LAN network card Use the Type drop down menu to select the Wireless LAN Access Point interface type Fill in the required settings for the Wireless LAN Access Point Address Assign an IP address for the access point For this interface type the address must be statically defined Enter the address into this entry field Netmask This interface type requires a statically defined netmask Enter the network mask into this entry field Default Gateway If you wish to use a default gateway with this interface select Static from the drop down menu and enter the gateway address in the entry field Otherwise select None SSID Enter the network name for the wireless network here Enter a string without space characters here This should be a string up to 32 characters long Channel Use the drop down menu to select a frequency channel for the network Use WEP If you wish to use WEP encryption on the wireless LAN select Yes from the drop down menu Security Note You should always use WEP encryption as an unencrypted network presents a se
117. ay be noticeable Moving forward e g standard time to daylight saving time e The timeout for WebAdmin will expire and your session will no longer be valid Time based reports will have no data for the skipped hour In most graphs this time period will appear as a straight line in the amount of the old value e Accounting reports will contain values of O for all variables during this time Moving backward e g daylight saving time to standard time e There are already log data for the corresponding span of time in the time based reports that for system purposes come from the future These data will not be overwritten e Log data will be written as normal when the time point before the reset is reached again e Most diagrams will display the values recorded during this period as compressed 40 Using the Security System e Accounting reports will retain the values recorded from the future Once the time point of the reset is re reached the ac counting files will be written again as normal Because of these difficulties we recommend that the time be set only during the first configuration and that only minor adjustments be made later We recommend setting the system clock to Central European Time CET This is the original time The system then runs always in CET not in in CEST Central European Summer Time We recommend not to change the time for summer especially not when the collected reporting and accountin
118. ble MTU for an Ethernet interface is 1500 Bytes The following value is the default for the Standard Ethernet Interface 1500 Byte For the interface type PPP over Ethernet PPPoA DSL Connection a value for the maximum transmission rate must be defined in bytes in the MTU Size entry field For the PPP over Ethernet PPPoA DSL Connection inter face type a MTU value is defined by default 1460 Byte Confirm these settings by clicking Add The system will now check the address and network mask for semantic validity After a successful check the new interface will appear in the Current Interface Status table The interface is not yet enabled status light is red Enable the interface by clicking the status light Using the Security System The interface is now enabled status light shows green The Oper column will at first show that the interface is Down the system requires a short time to configure and load the settings 190 Click the Refresh button to load the menu again Further information about the Refresh function can be found in chapter on page 44 When the message Up appears the interface is fully operational The network card settings are displayed in the Parameters column 165 Using the Security System 4 3 3 Routing Every network connected computer uses a routing table to determine where outbound packets should be sent The routing table contains the information necessary to determine for instance if the de
119. both include the concept of ports A port is an additional identifier in the cases of TCP and UDP a number between O and 65535 that allows a computer to distinguish between multiple concurrent connections between the same two computers TCP and UDP packets have both a sending port and a destination port Protocol A protocol is a well defined and standardized set of rules that govern how a client and server interact Some well known protocols and their associated services include HTTP WWW FIP FTP and NNTP news Proxy Application Gateway Proxies often called application gateways separate two networks at the network IP or TCP UDP level while still allowing certain kinds of communication There can be no direct connection between an internal system and an external computer Proxies exclusively operation the application level Proxies based firewalls use a Dual Homed Gateway that does not forward IP packets Proxies operated as specialized programs on the gateway can now receive connections for a specific protocol treat the transmitted traffic on the application level and forward it afterwards 364 Glossary RADIUS RADIUS stands for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a protocol designed to allow network devices such as routers to authenticate users against a central database Router Gateway A router is a network device that is designed to forward packets to their destination along the most eff
120. cal Logs Log Files The logs generated by the system will be managed in the Local Logs tab 4 10 1 Settings Configure the basic settings for the creation of log files in the Settings menu Status Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green Important Note When this function is disabled the Internet security system will not create Log Files Local Log File Archives This function locally stores generated log files to the Security system Configure the settings for the local log file archive in the Local Log File Archive window By default this function is enabled automatically once the logging functions are enabled Remote Log File Archives This function allows you to save the generated log files to a remote host or server The settings for the automating of the log file archive on a separate server are configured in the Remote Log File Archive 331 Using the Security System Local Log File Archive This window allows you to observe the utilization of the local log file partition The diagram first displays the used disk space in MB as well as the utilization of the partition in percent In the lower window select from the drop down menu how the system has to react if a specific part of the partition is overloaded with log files Three levels with different actions can be selected here Delete Log Files span of time In this drop down menu select the length of time
121. can outgoing Messages Content Filter Scan outgoing Disable messages _Disabie_ MIME Error Checking Enable File Extension Filter Enable _ Virus Protection _Enable_ Expression Filter Enable The Scan Outgoing Messages function uses the Content Filter for outgoing connections 260 Using the Security System MIME Error Checking The MIME Error Checking module can detect errors in messages which have been encrypted with MIME MIME stands for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME defines the structure and the composition of e mails and of other Internet messages This is an encoding rule which allows for the transmission of non text documents e g pictures audio and video in text based transmission systems The non text elements are encrypted at the sender and decrypted at the receiver The MIME Error Checking module can help detecting attacks in which error tolerance variations in the MIME decryption software are being utilized Action This drop down menu allows you to select the action the proxy should take upon finding a message with a filtered string The following actions are possible e Reject The message will be bounced back to the sender with a 5xx error message and a comment A Bounce Mail to the sender does not contain a reason why the e mail was blocked e Blackhole The e mail will be accepted and silently dropped Do not use this action unless you are absolutely certain
122. ce is Down the system requires a short time to configure and load the settings 183 Click the Refresh button to load the menu again Further information about the Refresh function can be found in chapter on page 36 When the message Up appears the interface is fully operational The network card settings are displayed in the Parameters column 4 3 2 7 PPP over Serial Modem Line This type of interface is required if you wish to con nect to the Internet through a PPP modem via the serial interface For the configur ation you need a serial interface and an external PPP modem on the security system And you also need the DSL access data including password You will get these data from your provider Setting up PPP over Serial Modem 1In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu 184 Click on the New button to open the Add Interface menu 185 Now enter the name of the interface into the Name entry field 186 From the Hardware drop down menu select the serial interface 160 Using the Security System 187 From the Type drop down menu select the PPP over serial modem line type of interface Address Keep the default setting Assigned by remote if you have no fix IP address If you have a fix IP address select Static from the drop down menu and enter the address into the entry field If you wish to configure the Uplink Failover on Interface failover for the network card adhere to the description of this funct
123. ch all the other nodes must use to access the wireless network 162 Confirm these settings by clicking Add The system will now check the address and network mask for semantic validity After a successful check the new interface will appear in the Current Interface Status table The interface is not yet enabled status light is red 163 Enable the interface by clicking the status light The interface is now enabled status light shows green The Oper column will at first show that the interface is Down the system requires a short time to configure and load the settings 164 Click the Refresh button to load the menu again Further information about the Refresh function can be found in chapter on page 36 When the message Up appears the interface is fully operational The network card settings are displayed in the Parameters column 144 Using the Security System 4 3 2 4 Virtual LAN Virtual LAN VLAN tech nology allows a network to be segregated into multiple smaller network segments at the Ethernet level layer 2 This can be useful for in stance when security con siderations require that cer tain clients only be allowed to communicate with certain other ones In large net works this can also be useful to connect physically separate clients on the same logical network segment A VLAN capable switch can assign ports to distinct groups For example a 20 port switch could assign ports 1 through 10 to VLAN 1 a
124. checks that the sender and receiver IP addresses have not been changed in transmission Packets are authenticated using a checksum created using a Hash based Message Authentication Code HMAC in connection with a key One of the following hashing algorithms will be used Message Digest Version 5 MD5 This algorithm generates a 128 bit checksum from a message of any size This checksum is like a fingerprint of the message and will change if the message is altered This hash value is sometimes also called a digital signature or a message digest The Secure Hash SHA 1 algorithm generates a hash similar to that of MD5 though the SHA 1 hash is 160 bits long SHA 1 is more secure than MDS due to its longer key Compared to MDS an SHA 1 hash is somewhat harder to compute and requires more CPU time to generate The computation speed depends of course on the processor speed and the number of IPSec VPN connections in use at the Security Gateway In addition to encryption the Encapsulated Security Payload pro tocol ESP offers the ability to authenticate senders and verify packet contents If ESP is used in Tunnel Mode the complete IP packet header and payload is encrypted New unencrypted IP and ESP headers are added to the encapsulating packet The new IP header contains the address of the receiving gateway and the address 286 Using the Security System of the sending gateway These IP addresses are those of the VPN tunnel For ESP w
125. cific profile in the Profiles table If you have already defined the group in your Active Directory AD you must give the same name to the profile e g http_access as to the group in the tab service Like that you only need to define those profiles for the user group for which the access to specific websites shall be prevented Configuring Surf Protection Profiles is described in chapter on page 229 Note Changes in Proxies become effective immediately without further notice Enabling the HTTP Proxy 1In the Proxies tab open the HTTP menu 2Enable the proxy by clicking the Enable button in the Global Settings window Another entry window will open 242 Inthe Operation mode drop down menu select the mode to use Note again that some modes require client side configuration The modes are described in chapter Operation Modes 224 Using the Security System Having set the Standard or Transparent mode continue with step 243 If you have selected the User Authentication mode from the Operation mode drop down menu define the authentication method to use here in the User Authentication window Authentication Methods Only those authentication methods that you have configured in the Settings User Authentication menu are available here If you have configured the Local Users method use the Allowed users selection menu to choose users allowed to use the proxy Local users are defined in the Definitions Users men
126. client yet This technique is used for the resumption of an interrupted data transfer The PUT method allows for a modification of existing sources and or for the creation of new data on the server In contrast to the POST method the URL in the PUT request identifies the data sent with the request and not the source Clicking on the Enable button enables the function status light is green Allowed Target Services Use the Allowed target services selection menu to choose services that the HTTP proxy should be allowed to access By default the services with the ports are already available to which a connection is considered as being safe TCP Port Enter the TCP IP Port in the entry field By default this is set to the TCP IP Port 8080 Clear HTTP Proxy Cache The HTTP Proxy Cache proxy stores a copy of often visited pages locally reducing load times By clicking the Start button the cache will be cleared and any new accesses will be loaded from the remote Internet site 228 Using the Security System 4 6 1 1 Content Filter Surf Protection The Surf Protection Pro files function allows you to produce profiles which prevent access to certain websites These profiles can then be associated with certain users or networks thus allowing control over which sites users may access The categories are based on the URL data base from Cobion Security Technologies and can be edited in the Surf Protection Categories table
127. control allows for user based Accounting in the HTTP Proxy access protocol Proxy Service and Authentication Methods The SOCKSv5 SMTP and HTTP services can be configured to allow or disallow clients based on IP address or on username and password combinations In order to use User Authentication you must select at least one database against which the security system should authenticate users If user authentication is enabled and no database is selected the proxy service cannot be used The security system supports user authentication against e a RADIUS Server e an NT SAM user list e an Active Directory NT Domain Membership e an LDAP Server e an internal database defined in WebAdmin The five user databases can be checked one after the other 4 1 7 1 RADIUS RADIUS stands for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service and is a protocol for allowing network devices e g routers to authenticate users against a central database In addition to user information RADIUS can store technical information used by network devices Such as protocols supported IP addresses telephone numbers routing information and so on Together this information constitutes a user profile that is stored in a file or database on the RADIUS server In addition to authenticating dial up users RADIUS can be used as a generic authentication protocol The RADIUS protocol is very flexible and servers are available for most operating systems including Mi
128. crosoft Windows NT 2000 The 67 Using the Security System RADIUS implementation on this security system allows you to con figure access rights on the basis of proxies and users Before you can use RADIUS authentication you must have a functioning RADIUS server on the network As passwords are trans ferred in clear text unencrypted we strongly recommend that the RADIUS server be inside the network protected by the security system and that the security system and server be on the same switch The following section details the setting up Microsoft IAS RADIUS Server for MS Windows NT and 2000 If you use a different server you will need the following information to enable the operation of the security system together with the user authentication The authentication request comprises three set fields e Username e Password in clear text PAP e Type of proxy the string http smtp or socks in the NAS Identifier field Your RADIUS server should use this information to determine whether or not access should be granted and should send back a properly formatted reply Configuring Microsoft s IAS RADIUS Server IAS is a part of all versions of Microsoft Windows 2000 Server but is generally not installed by default For Microsoft Windows NT4 IAS is a part of the NT4 Option Pack and is available without charge The MS Windows NT4 IAS has fewer features than the 2000 version but is nevertheless sufficient for user au
129. ct a service The available services are HTTP SMTP SOCKS and Web Admin 96 In the Attribute Name field enter the name of the attribute If you are using authentication using the MemberOf property on a Microsoft Active Directory Server this should be the name of the Security Group to use Example socks_users 90 97 98 Every member Using the Security System In the Attribute Value field enter the DN for the attribute The attribute value is the DN a E mm Daa ADSL HO See BOCUUCLCCICO Microsoft Active Directory displays the DN of attributes in the Management Console under ADSI Edit Here under the Base DN example dc example dc com find the attribute name example socks _users and right click it A window labeled CN socks_users Properties will open Use the Select which properties to view drop down menu to choose Both and in the Select a property to view drop down menu choose distinguishedName The DN for this attribute will be shown in Value s Click the Save button to save these settings defined as a MemberOf the security group socks_users will be allowed to use this service 91 Using the Security System 4 1 8 WebAdmin Settings Configure the access to the WebAdmin configuration tool in this menu General Settings Language In this drop down menu you can deter J mine the language Timeout seconds In this entry field enter the interv
130. ction field Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an entry click cancel If you are simultaneously assigning a Profile to a local user and to a network this Profile will only take effect if the user accesses the HTTP proxy from the configured network Only one Surf Pro tection Profile can be configured for each user or network Important Note Assigned Network Blocks Select the Network from this field Clicking on this field with the entry opens the selection field Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an entry click cancel Assigning Surf Protection Profiles By default the table contains already a Blank Assignment If this blank assignment has not been edited yet continue with step 1By clicking on the Add blank Assignment button add a new blank assignment 2From the Profile Name field select the Surf Protection Profile 257 From the Assigned local Users field select the local user for this profile 258 From the Assigned Network Blocks select the network for this profile 259 Enable the profile assignment by clicking the status light The status light is green If a user or computer defined in the profile attempts to access a blocked website access will be blocked and the user will receive a message explaining why 239 Using the Security System Skip Image Scanning In order to enhance the per formance of the Virus Protection option specific contents of
131. ctive Directory the domain joining method of NTLM and OpenLDAP If an external user database is already present on the network you can use it instead of having to re enter user accounts on the security system itself Important Note Please note that several authentication methods cannot be sup ported at the same time In MS Windows based networks the Domain Controller DC man ages access to a set of network resources e g applications printers etc for a group of clients The user needs only to log in to the domain to gain access to the resources A Domain Controller is a server that is running a version of the MS Windows 2000 Server or 2003 Server operating system and has Active Directory AD installed which is Microsoft s trademarked directory service A directory service provides a centralized location to store information in a distributed environment about network devices services and the people who use them For MS Windows users it provides account information privileges profiles and policy When an authentication method is used together with Active Directory and with the cor responding settings the authentication e g before accessing an own Service is no longer made by the security system but by the Active Directory Server User Authentication requires users to identify themselves before using network services In comparison with an IP based access control the 66 Using the Security System user based access
132. cy org rsoeder projektagentur com schlegel projektagentur com hall project agency com hacken marx p av do not reply fw notify net 2 mustermann project agency com rstriegel projektagentur com Lists are used in contrast to configure functions that not only allow more than one value to be configured and where the listed objects do not need to be first defined by the administrator In some instances the order of the configured values is also relevant Each list can contain many pages of values and each page displays ten entries The Interfaces menu for instance uses a list to allow access to the Wireless LAN Access Point The first row of the table shows the number of pages in the list on the left the current page is shown in white and the total number of entries on the right next to the symbol Note that if you roll the mouse over one of the red page numbers a tooltip appears showing the first and last entries on that page see picture at right This can help to navigate quickly between pages The second row contains tools to control the display of the list Note that these do not change the configuration information but rather the way in which these entries are displayed within WebAdmin In cases where order is important only the order indicated by the numbers next to entries has an effect on the configuration of the function The buttons and Y in the
133. d according to its priority Enable the Copy TOS Flag function by clicking on the Enable button 314 Using the Security System Send ICMP Messages If a data packet overwrites the configured MTU value the system will send an ICMP message to the source address Destination unreachable fragmentation needed This allows for using Path MTU Discovery Automatic CRL Fetching There might be situations in which the provider of a certificate attempts to revoke the confirmation awarded with still valid certificates for example if it has become known that the receiver of the certificate fraudulently obtained it by using wrong data name etc or because an attacker has got hold of the private key which is part of the certified public key For this purpose so called Certificate Revocation Lists or CRLs are used They normally contain the serial numbers of those certificates of a certifying instance that have been held invalid and that are still valid according to their respective periods of validity After the expiration of this periods the certificate will no longer be valid and must therefore not be maintained in the block list The Automatic CRL Fetching function automatically requests the CRL through the URL defined in the partner certificate via HTTP Anonymous FTP or LDAP Version 3 On request the CRL can be downloaded saved and updated once the validity period has expired Enable the function by clicking on the Enable button status
134. d disk Download Historical RM Logs This function is available as soon as the first Historical Log File has been generated Clicking on the Start button opens a dialogue by which the RM Log File file arm_logs tar can be downloaded to a local computer RM Remote Connection This window allows you to configure the RM Log Files Transfer The new settings do not influence existing log files Status Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green 328 Using the Security System An advanced entry window will open ry Security Note Both data transfer methods are unencrypted If the log files are sent to a server outside the private network this should be done through a Host to Net IPSec VPN tunnel An existing Net to Net connection can not be used Method For the data transfer the methods Syslog and SMB CIFS Share are available For both methods you must first define an RM server on the security system to which the RM Log Files are sent The server and or the host are added in the Definitions Networks menu Then you can make the following settings e The Syslog method is recommended for a _LAN network architecture Once you have selected this method you make the following settings Host From the drop down menu select the RM server to which the RM Log Files shall be sent Service Select the service from the drop down menu that shall be used for the data transfer Do not confuse those settings with
135. d have not already been used for another key such as for an IKE key If an attacker discovers or cracks an old key he or she will have no way of guessing future keys The IPSec VPN system on this security system supports the Group 1 MODP768 Group 2 MODP 1024 Group 5 MODP 1536 Group X MODP 2048 Group X MODP 3072 and Group X MODP 4096 protocols If you do not wish to use PFS select No PFS By default this is set to Group 5 MODP 1536 PFS requires a fair amount of processing power to complete the Diffie Hellmann key exchange PFS is also often not 100 compatible between manufacturers In case of problems with the firewall s performance or with building connections to remote systems you should disable this option Important Note Compression This algorithm compresses IP packets before they are encrypted resulting in faster data speeds This system supports the Deflate algorithm 297 If you have not yet named this policy scroll back to the Name field and enter one now 298 Create the new policy by clicking Add 300 Using the Security System The new policy will appear in the IPSec Policies table 4 7 3 Local Keys The Local Keys menu allows an administrator to manage local X 509 cer tificates to define the local IPSec identifier and to generate a local RSA key pair Local IPSec X 509 Key In this window you can define local keys for X 509 certificates pro vided you have alread
136. d of time since when the e mail has arrived to the Internet security system 274 Using the Security System Status The states of the e mails are displayed in the Proxy Content Manager through symbols e deferred The e mail will be sent to the intended recipient Normally messages of this type are forwarded soon after the proxy receives them If however temporary problems delivering the message are encountered it may remain in the queue with this status for a short while Such messages will be delivered as soon as the destination host can be contacted e quarantined The e mail will be quarantined due to the Quarantine configuration to one of the Content Filter functions Unwanted or dangerous content such as a virus have been dis covered in the message Such messages will remain in the table until an administrator deletes or sends them On the right side next to the status symbol for those e mails which are kept in quarantine it is displayed which function blocked the message SP Spam Protection VP Virus Protection Filter File Extention Filter EXP Expression Filter MIME MIME Error Checking e permanent error 8 The e mail contains a permanent error Sender The sender of an e mail is displayed in this column For the SMTP type this is the sender address on the envelope For the POP3 type this is the address of the From header of an e mail If no sender address is displayed the e mail contains
137. de Master Security system 2 is in Hot Standby mode Slave and monitors the active system through Link Beat via the data transfer connection Security system 1 regularly sends Heart Beat requests through this connection which are answered by system 2 If necessary the security system 2 also receives updates through this data transfer connection so that in the case of system failure on the primary it can take over operations immediately The graphic shows a network architecture with a High Availability HA system to which an internal network and a DMZ is connected The installation instruction describes how to connect one private network to a HA system External Network r s A l ES Router SS gt Internet Switch Internal Network LAN System 1 System 2 External IP data transfer WAM Hot Standby Mode E switch 98 Using the Security System Hardware and Software Requirements A license with the High Availability option the License Key must be imported to both security systems Normal and Hot Standby mode For more information on Licensing see chapter on page 44 e 2 security systems with identical software version and hardware e 2 additional Ethernet network cards for the data transfer line for monitoring the Heart Beat requests two Ethernet network cards that support this function are necessary e 1 Ethernet crossover cable e 1 serial interface cable optional
138. der will be added to the e mail by which it can be sorted or filtered on the mail server or in the e Mail programs of the recipient In addition the word SPAM will be added to the message subject line A description of how the rules are created in Microsoft Outlook 2000 can be found on page 268 Spam sender Whitelist This control list is defined for the Spam Protection function Enter the e mail addresses of those senders into the list whose messages you wish to allow through The function of the Control List is identical to the Ordered List and described in chapter on page 34 267 Using the Security System The Header Many of the functions will add headers to the messages scanned The Header will inform the user on specific characteristics of a message If you select the Pass action recipients can configure their e mail programs to filter messages with high spam scores The following is a list of the headers the SMTP proxy may insert e X Spam Score This header is added by the Spam Detection option It contains a score consisting of a numerical value and of a number of minus and plus characters The higher the value the more likely it is that the message is spam If you select the Pass action under Spam Detection recipients can configure their e mail software to filter messages e X Spam Flag This header is set to Yes when the proxy classifies a message as spam e X Spam Report The proxy identified a message as sp
139. drop down menu Source Destination Ports In the left entry menu enter the Source Port that is the Client Side of the service In the right entry menu enter the Destination Port that is the Server Side of the service 116 The other settings depend on the selected protocol For the TCP and UDP protocols you need the following two values Entry options A single port e g 80 or a port range e g 1024 64000 Source Destination Ports In the left hand entry menu enter the Source Port i e the Client Side of the service In the right hand entry menu enter the Destination Port i e the Server Side of the service 114 Using the Security System The ESP and AH protocols are used for IPsec VPN connections The port entered here should be agreed upon with the remote end of the IPSec VPN tunnel SPI Enter a value from 256 to 65535 Values up to and including 255 are reserved by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA For the ICMP protocol select a type of ICMP packet from the ICMP type drop down menu For the IP protocol enter the protocol number into the Protocol Number entry field Comment You can enter a service description in this entry field 117 Save the Services by clicking on the Add Definition button After successful definition the new service will appear in the service table Defining Service Group 1Under the Definitions tab open the Service menu 2Click on the New Definition button The ent
140. dwidth kbits These values are used as basis for the bandwidth management system incorrect values can lead to poor management of the data flow The Quality of Service QoS function is described in chapter Uplink Bandwidth kbits This setting will only appear if the QoS function is enabled In this entry menu enter the available 163 Using the Security System 188 189 164 bandwidth for the Uplink in full kilobits This value can be determined either from the values of the upstream interface or from the router On an interface to the Internet this value corresponds to the bandwidth of the Internet connection Downlink Bandwidth kbits This setting will only appear if the QoS function is enabled In this entry menu enter the available bandwidth for the Downlink in full kilobits On an interface to the Internet this value corresponds to the band width of the Internet connection MTU Size The MTU is the size in bytes of the largest transmittable packet MTU stands for Maximum Transfer Unit For connections using the TCP IP protocol the data will be grouped into packets A maximum size will be defined for these packets If now the maximum size is too high it might happen that data packets with information concerning the PPP over Ethernet protocol are not delivered and recognized correctly These data packets will be sent again However the performance can be limited if the upper value is too low The largest possi
141. e Socks Syntax This value was set while creating the attribute and cannot be changed From step 2 this should be Boolean Edit Attribute You can use this field to set the value of the attribute The possible values are TRUE and FALSE Value s The current value of the attribute is shown here 93 Save your settings by clicking OK 85 Using the Security System Now make the settings on the Internet security system The settings in the configuration tool WebAdmin are explained on page 88 Configuring a Novell eDirectory Server Make sure that there is a user configured on your LDAP server to have full read privileges for the directory This will be the query user ry Security Note Make sure that the user has only read privileges In most cases you should use the groupMembership query type with Novell eDirectory NDS8 as this allows an existing user index to be easily extended for proxy rights The index can also be configured to use user defined attributes which must be manually set for each user in the index If you wish to au thenticate on the basis of particular User Attributes every user account in the directory must be edited to define access rights This is done by setting a particular attribute for each user which either grants or denies access to a service You will need Novell ConsoleOne to configure the eDirectory Server The configuration and management of the Novell eDirectory server is described in detail
142. e CSR is for a road warrior connection enter the name of the user here If the CSR is for a host enter the hostname 315 To save the entries click the on the Start button The Certificate Request CSR KEY will appear in the Host CSRs and Certificates table The table will also show the type name and VPN IP of the CSR The request can now be signed by the Signing CA created in the first step Step 3 Generate the Certificate 1In the Host CSRs and Certificates table select the CSR KEY certificate request 2Use the drop down menu at the bottom of the table to select the Issue CERT from CSR function An entry field labeled Signing CA Passphrase will appear Enter the password of the Signing CA here 316 Click Start From the CSR KEY the CA will generate the CERT KEY certificate the certificate will replace the CSR in the table Step 4 Download the Certificate 312 Using the Security System 1In the Host CSRs and Certificates select the new certificate 2Use the drop down menu at the bottom of the table to select a download format DER In the Passphrase field you must enter the password of the Private Key PEM No password is necessary PKCS 12 Enter the password of the Private Key in the Passphrase field In the Export Pass field enter a different password This password will be required to install the certificate on the client computer 317 Click Start You must now install the certificate on the remo
143. e Intrusion Protec tion System IPS detects IPS attack signatures or prevents an intrusion the system will send a message to the administrator The e mail address of the administrator can be configured in the System Settings menu Detected Packets Use this drop down menu to select the severity level from which on a warning should be sent Intrusion Detection e All levels for each level of risk e High and medium severity for high and medium levels of risk e High severity only only for high risk levels e None no warning will be sent Blocked Packets Use this drop down menu to select the level of risk from which on a warning should be sent Intrusion Prevention e All levels for each level of risk e High and medium severity for high and medium levels of risk e High severity only only for high risk levels e None no warning will be sent 4 4 2 Rules The Rules menu contains the Intrusion Protection System IPS set of rules The already existing base set of rules with the IPS attack signatures can be updated through the Pattern Up2Date function if 192 Using the Security System desired New IPS attack signatures will automatically be imported as IPS rule to the IPS rules table The Pattern Up2Date function is described in further detail in chapter on page 48 IPS Rules Overview Intrusion Protection Rules Total 2491 entries 2447 filtered 44 shown New Rule Z Filters 7 attack responses 0 R
144. e network mask 255 255 255 255 Host The networks are shown in the Networks menu If an interface is configured using a dynamic addressing scheme for example through DHCP or PPPoE these settings are automatically updated This means that all functions for example packet filter rules configured with these aliases will automatically use the correct addresses Hardware List This table lists all net work cards and serial interfaces installed on the security system together with the rele vant hardware informa tion The table shows for example the system assigned ID Sys ID 125 Using the Security System type of network card hardware MAC address Name Parame ters and PCI bus information Bus Device Function PCI Device ID PPP modems which are based on the serial console can be connected to the serial interface For more information on configuring the serial interface with a PPP modem please see chapter on page 160 Error The Hardware List table doesn t list all of the network cards Possible Causes The missing network cards were added after the installation of the security system or were not recognized during instal lation Please contact the support department of your security system provider If you change the IP Address of the internal network card ethO Attention g you may lock yourself out 126 Using the Security System 4 3 2 1 Standard Ethernet Interface To configure
145. e your settings by clicking Save 267 In the Allow Relay from window select the network or hosts which shall be allowed to send e mails via the SMTP Proxy Security Note Messages sent from those networks will never be scanned by Spam Detection From the hosts which are not in the Selected selection field e mails can only be sent to those domains which are defined in the Domain Groups defined The basic settings are now made E mails can now be sent from the configured networks via the proxy The Domain Groups Table Several domains can be comprised to one group in this table e g mydomain com mydomain de etc For each domain and or sub 252 Using the Security System domain a line is added to the table They will be summarized under the group name The following picture shows four Domain Groups Domain Groups Total 5 entries New domain 8 Development project agency org Subdomains are NOT included a Internal_Communication intranet project agency com Subdomains are included projektagentur com Subdomains are NOT included project agency com Subdomains are NOT included software com Subdomains are NOT included The functions from the left to the right are Deleting a Domain Group 8 Clicking on the trash can icon deletes a domain group from the table Group This is the name of the group This group name is required to assign a specific profile to the domain in the line Open the editing window by clic
146. ebAdmin The configuration of network cards and virtual interfaces is described in chapter on page 122 17 Configure the internal Network In the Soeqanass A Definitions o a tab open the Networks menu and check the settings for the internal network Three logical networks were defined during installation based on your settings for the internal network card ethO The interface Internal Interface consisting of the defined IP address example 192 168 2 100 and the host network mask 255 255 255 255 25 Installation 18 19 26 The broadcast network Internal Broadcast consisting of the broadcast address example 192 168 2 255 and the host net work mask 255 255 255 255 The internal network Internal Network consisting of the de fined IP address example 192 168 2 0 and the defined net work mask example 255 255 255 0 Defining new Networks is described in chapter on page 106 Configure the external Network Card In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu and configure the interface to be used to connect to the external network Internet The choice of interface and the required configuration depend on what kind of connection to the Internet you will be using The configuration of network cards and virtual interfaces is described in chapter on page 122 Define Masquerading Rules If you wish to use private IP addresses for your internal network and wish to connect directly with
147. ecipient In addition the word SPAM will be added to the message subject line For a description of how to create rules in Microsoft Outlook 2000 please see on page 268 The Header Many of the SMTP proxy functions will add headers to the messages scanned The Header will inform the user on specific characteristics of a message If you select the Pass action recipients can configure their e mail programs to filter messages with high spam scores The following list contains all possible Headers e X Spam Score This header is added by the Spam Protection option It contains a score consisting of a numerical value and of a number of minus and plus characters The higher the value the more likely it is that the message is spam If you select the Pass action under the Spam Protection option recipients can configure their e mail programs to filter messages with high spam scores 248 Using the Security System e X Spam Flag This header is set to Yes when the proxy classifies a message as spam e X Spam Report The proxy identified a message as spam The added Multiline Header contains a readable and accessible anti spam report Spam Sender Whitelist This control list can only be defined for the Spam Protection option Enter the e mail addresses of those senders into the list whose messages you wish to allow through File Extension Filter The firewall filters attachments with the ex tensions from the control list Expre
148. ecognition of successful attacks backdoor 0 Rules for backdoor software bad traffic Recognizes traffic that should never occur chat Recognition of messaging and chat traffic ddos Rules for Distributed Denial of Service dns Rules for DNS protocol dos Denial of Service attacks finger Rules for finger protocol ftp Rules for FTP protocol icmp Rules for ICMP protocol pr pe D pe a pr D pr D pe D pe 0 0 0 0 0 exploit 0 Well known exploits of specific software 0 0 0 0 icmp info Recognition of assumingly harmless ICMP traffic The overview contains all IPS sets of rules The functions in the overview from the left to the right BOA Clicking on the status light enables the IPS set of rules tr 7 9 The IPS rule can be configured as alarm rule Intrusion Detection or as blocking rule Intrusion Prevention Clicking on the icon switches the application of the IPS rules in this group P Clicking on the folder icon opens the sub tab with all protocols of this group By clicking again on the icon you will get back to the overview The additional functions in the sub tab are described in the IPS Rules Sub tab section Group The name of the IPS group of rules is displayed in this column The groups are put in alphabetical order according to this name Clicking in the header automatically displays the groups in de or increasing alphabetical order 193 Using the Security System Hits This column d
149. ecurity system you can use this option to delete all messages of a certain type E Mails being sent or forwarded while the system is deleting messages will not be affected From the Please select drop down menu select the type and start the action by clicking on the Start button If you wish to actualize the SMTP POP3 Proxy Content table select the Refresh proxy content table action from the Please select drop down menu Messages of the selected type will be deleted without further Attention I confirmation Filters The Filters function allows you to filter E Mails with specific attributes from the table The function facilitates the management of huge networks since the protocols of a specific type can be presented in a concise way Filtering e mails 1Click on the Filters button The entry window will open 283 Enter the filter attributes in the following fields Not all attributes have to be defined Type If you wish to filter e mails of a specific type select them from the drop down menu Status If you wish to filter e mails of a specific status select them from the drop down menu 277 Using the Security System Content Filter Type This drop down menu allows you to filter e mails that have been filtered by a specific function from the Content Filter Sender This drop down menu allows you to filter e mails with a specific sender address Recipient s This drop down menu allows you to filter e mails with a specif
150. ed Event buffering activated A portscan was detected The originating host was lt IP gt A portscan from the given IP address was de tected The Portscan Detection function is de scribed in chapter on page 190 Event buffering has been activated Further Intrusion Protection events will be collected and sent to you when the collection period has expired If more events occur this period will be increased Further information on the Intru sion Prevention event can be found in the noti fication e mail File transfer request Using the Security System This is the file you requested 349 Using the Security System WARN 001 005 080 081 350 A feature will expire The featur is time limited and will expire in Please contact your local Novell partner or a Novell sales representative to obtain a license update E Mail addresses America s www novell com offices americas Europe Asia Pacific and Africa www novell com offices For technical questions pleas feel fr to visit our user bulletin board at http support novell com forums 2sm html or our documentation resources at http www novell com documentation nsma5 Failed login attempt from IP at time with username HA check no link beat on interface retrying The link beat monitoring system on the firewall failed The system will now try again If the system continues to
151. ed You can choose between a 40 bit and 104 bit keys A 40 bit key requires 5 hexadecimal num bers while a 104 bit key requires 13 numbers Please note that a hexadecimal number is two characters each either a number 0 9 or a letter A F Example of a 40 bit key 17 A5 6B 45 23 137 Using the Security System e Access Mode only for Wireless LAN Access Point mode If you wish to use the MAC address filter you must compile a list of the MAC addresses which are explicitly allowed to connect to the network positive filter or which are explicitly not allowed to negative filter How to determine the MAC address of a computer is described in the next section Determining the MAC address If you have not yet installed your network card you can simply examine it to determine its MAC address the unique MAC address is usually printed on the card itself If the wireless LAN is already being used and you wish to install a new MAC filter you can use the following commands on the mobile nodes to determine the MAC address If you are configuring a small wireless LAN the mobile computers are MS Windows computers and you have physical access to them follow these steps 10pen the Command Prompt 2The Command Prompt can be found in the Start menu under Programs Accessories Command Prompt 143 Enter the following command at the prompt ipconfig all 144 Press the Enter key The Physical Address row contains the MAC addre
152. ed Licenses window will show the details of your license Licensed Users IPs The functions in this window are used for licenses that do not allow for an unlimited number of users IP addresses View current User IP Listing The table contains all IP addresses that are relevant for the licensing The current user table is always loaded when this menu is opened The table will also be displayed if the license is an unlimited version 46 Using the Security System Reset User IPs Listing If you wish to reconfigure the internal network you can reset the user table by this action Then there is a reboot the system will shut down completely and reboot This action is enabled by clicking on the Start button 47 Using the Security System nel Up2Date Service Chick Start to prefetch available system Up2Date packager now Chick Start to owntoad and install available pattern Up2Date packager now Je The Up2Date Service makes it easy to keep your security system software updated New virus definitions system patches and security features will be installed to your current system All Up2Date data are digitally signed and encrypted and are transferred over a secure chan Any unsigned or forged Up2Date packages are rejected and deleted A number of servers are maintained for both System Up2Date and Pattern Up2Date that are dialed in the given sequence If the first Up2Date server is not a
153. eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 121 AS 2INterfaCe S sivccsicscvetcetrcsaciaiscaseacesscasaegensdccaccciceetestiecteets 122 4 3 2 1 Standard Ethernet Interface ccscceeseeseeneeeeseeeeeeees 127 4 3 2 2 Additional Address on Ethernet Interface 0 00005 133 4 3 2 3 Wireless LAN cccccccseseeeseneeneesesseaeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeoeas 135 4 3 2 4 Virtual LAN ccccccceseeneeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenseeeasenees 145 4 3 2 5 PPPOE DSL Connection cccccseseeeneneeeeeneeneeneeneeeeenens 150 4 3 2 6 PPTPOE PPPOA DSL Connections scecsseeeesnsessnnees 155 4 3 2 7 PPP over Serial Modem Lime csccceeceeeeeneeneeeeeeeenees 160 4 3 3 ROUtING cccceeeceeeeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeeseananees 166 4 3 4 NAT Masquerading c ccsccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeuseeeneeseees 168 FB 4 LLINAT TA O T TT 168 4 3 4 2 Masquerading csccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenenes 172 4 3 4 3 Load Balancing cececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneneeeeees 173 4 3 5 DHCP Serv r cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeaees 176 A 3 6 PP TP VPN aisetaiiees cece cctis ccalcieried aa auaa EEN 180 4 3 7 ACCOUNTING w csccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeuaeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeseeuaeeaueeeaees 186 4 3 8 PING Check ccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeueeaeeauaeeauaeas 188 4 4 Intrusion Protection csccccsseeseeceeeesenseneeeeceeeeeseeseeeesenseas 190 4 4 1 Settings ccccceceeececeee
154. eeee sees ee eee sees eeeeeaeaeaeaeeeaseeeeeeeeeeeenenee 190 AA 2 e E isc iscsi chaste dst cacete dines cvatedseeecetevseseecusesncsenscansuctuecens 192 4 4 3 sAAVANGE E A E A T 197 4 5 Packet Filter cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseseseeeeeanones 199 A S L RUNCS T eee e eee ee eee ee ee ee eee eeeeeee sees ee ee eae eeeeeeeeeeeeee 199 A S 2 ACMP wo cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeaeeseeeeeeseeeaeeaeeeaseeuaeeaeeesaees 211 4 5 3 AAVANCEM oo cceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeeuaeeeneesaees 214 4 6 Application Gateways Proxies ccseseseeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeee 220 A G LH TTP oo ccece eee e cece cence iaai eens esse eases ee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeeeee 221 4 6 1 1 Content Filter Surf Protection c ccsseeseseeeeeeeeeees 229 4 6 2 DNS 241 4 6 3 SOCKS woccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaeaseeeeeeeaeeseenoneeeoees 243 4 6 4 POPS3 wiccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeuesaseeeeeeeaeseeseouaeeaees 245 4 6 5 TAONt eccccccceeee cece eee eeeeeeeeee ae eeee ease eeseeeeeaeaseeeeeeeaeeseeeenee 250 4 6 6 SMTP oo cccccccece eee e eee eeeeeeeeseeeaeaeeeeeeeeesaseseeeaeaeeeeeeeeeseeeanenes 251 4 6 6 1 Content Filter cccscsceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeee 260 4 6 6 2 Spam Protection ccccscsceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeuaeeeeeeeeenenae 265 4 6 7 Proxy Content Manager ccccsscseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneanes 274 4 7 Virtual Private Networks IPSec VPN csesseseeeee
155. eeeeeeaseseeeeeeeseeees 48 4 1 4 Backup ccccesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeueeaeaseeeeuaeaeeseaueeeenenaes 55 41 5 SNMP o ccccec cece cece eee ee ee ee aaraa aaa Aaaa Kaona CAREA 62 4 1 6 Remote Syslog Server scccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 64 4 1 7 User Authentication ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeee 66 4 1 7 1 RADIUS cccccceee eee e cece eee e an apana anina apaia nagaya aaae ii 67 4 1 7 2 SAM NT 2000 XP cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 72 4 1 7 3 Active Directory NT Domain Membership 00 05 74 4 1 7 3 Active Directory NT Domain Membership 00005 74 4 1 7 4 LDAP Server oo ccceceeseeeeeee ee enon eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 76 4 1 8 WebAdmin Settings ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 92 4 1 9 WebAdmin Site Certificate s ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 95 4 1 10 High Availability sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 98 4 1 11 Shut down Restart ccccccsecssessseeseeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeanes 105 4 2 Networks and Services Definitions csccsseeseeeeeeeeees 105 4 2 1 NCtWOPKS cccceceeeeseeeeseeseneeseeeeseeeeseeeaseeeeseoeaseeeaseeeeeeaees 106 4 2 2 SCFVICES E E A A A a 113 423 USCIS aiapidu eee ee eens eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaseaeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeaees 117 4 3 Network Settings Network ccscseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 121 4 3 1 Hostname DyNDNs ccceeeeeeeeeee
156. eeeeeeeee 280 4 7 1 COMMECTIONS 22 ccceeeeeeeee eee ee ee eeeee esse eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeenaeees 288 4 7 2 POLICICS ccceceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeaeaeeeaeaeaseeeeeeeeeenenee 297 4 7 3 LOCal KCYS cccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeaeaseeeeeeeeeseeanes 301 4 7 4 Remote KeYS ccccceeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenensnens 304 4 7 5 L2TP Over IPSEC ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeuaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanes 307 4 7 6 CA Management cccccesceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeueneeceeauseueeueeeguaanas 309 4 7 7 AAVANCEM oie cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeoeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeneeeeananans 314 4 8 System Management Reporting cscceseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeenee 317 4 8 1 AAMINIstration ccccseeeee cece sees eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 317 4 8 2 V rUS weccceee cece cence inama eee eee eee eee esse eee eases eens eee 318 4 8 3 Hardware ccccecsceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeeeeseeaeeesaees 318 4 8 4 Network cccceeceeeee ee ee sees eeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeaseeeaeaeeee 319 4 8 5 Packet Filter ccccscsceeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeuaeeeeeeeeanenes 320 4 8 6 Content Filter ccccsccccssscscvesseveccnanssevecsesennssnacnecaneucantenceas 320 4 8 7 PPTP IPSeEC VPN cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneesesnenanee 321 4 8 8 Intrusion Protection ssssssssssunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 321 4 8 9 DNS 321 4 8 10 HTTP Proxy USaGe cccccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene
157. eeeeeeeeeeeaees 13 2 2 Installation Instructions ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 16 2 2 1 Software Installation ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenas 16 2 2 2 Configuring the Security System ssssssssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 21 S WeEDACMIN 1 cc cceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeaseeueeaseeuaeeaueesenens 29 SLIMfO BOX a e aaas aa aaa aaa aaae daka eaaa aa naate akaa iaaa aana 30 3 2 Tab List cccccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaeseeeuaeeans 30 3 3 Menus 31 3 3 1 The Status Light cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeens 31 3 3 2 Selection Field ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeanons 31 3 3 3 The Selection Table c cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeueeeuaeeanes 32 3 3 4 Drop down MeMUS ccscsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeuaeeeueeeoeans 33 3 3 5 Lists 34 3 4 Online Help ccccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeauaeseeeuaeeeeeeaeeeuaeages 35 3S Refresh oo cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeaseeuaeaseeuaeeauanaeeans 36 4 Using the Security System ccsceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee 37 4 1 Basic Settings System c ccccesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 39 4 1 1 SCttinGS ccccceeeeeeeee cece ences eens eee ee eeeeee esse eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 39 A 1 2 LICEMSING oceceeceeeeee ee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeuaeaeeeeeeeeeess 44 4 1 3 Up2Date Service cccccceeeeeee sees ee eeeeeeeeeeee
158. elating to your system hardware The sys tem collects statistics about CPU utilization RAM utiliza tion and swap utilization The security system collects graphics and statistics every five minutes and updates them The information can pe ens mee Ss also be updated manually by licking on the Reload button Don t use the Refresh button of the browser because this will log you out of the WebAdmin configuration tool CPU Load Daily Graph This diagram shows the current utilization of the CPU 318 Using the Security System Memory Usage Daily Graph The current RAM utilization statistics are shown here When more functions and subsystems are enabled on the firewall more RAM will be required to support them SWAP Usage Daily Graph This diagram shows the current amount of swap space being used Swap space is used to supplement RAM if your system is running out of available RAM you will see a sharp increase in swap usage 4 8 4 Network This menu shows current statistics relating to net work traffic These dia grams will not be useful unless the network cards have been correctly con figured in the Network Interfaces menu The configuration process for network cards is de scribed in chapter on page 122 319 Using the Security System 4 8 5 Packet Filter Packet filter violations in diagrams will be displayed in a graphic in this menu te The rule violations will also be logged to the Packe
159. em It lists all known associations between IP addresses and hardware MAC addresses a Local Network Connec tions This table lists all Active Internet connections servers an established a eae erg aa ir aster Sec et current network connections te o aa o 0 i 763 0 0 00 iiss 5 8 en semn to the firewall Connections w 0 0 LISTEN 2 Ryd se E through the firewall are not L J 6 0 um SE E shown to o 10 TINE VAIT p o 127 1 TINE VAIT tee 6 127 TINE VAIT ET or a Seana e ut zwr J 325 Using the Security System 4 9 Remote Management Remote Management The Remote Management tab contains the interfaces to further programs and tools which allow you to remotely administer the security system and the private networks 4 9 1 Report Manager RM The Report Manager collects and evaluates the log files generated on the security system Since data are compiled centrally on the Report Manager among others also the data from security solutions of other producers the administrator can compare and analyze the messages because they are clearly laid out and he can thus introduce the associated blocking measures against attacks fastly The Report Manager is a distinct product that must be acquired separately In the RM menu you enable the interface to the Report Manager RM and make the settings for the generation of local log files Next to the settings for the transfer of t
160. ement tasks 4 3 1 Hostname DynDNS Firewall Hostname Hostname Enter the host name for the security sys tem in this entry field Example firewall mydomain com A Hostname or domain name may contain alphanumeric period and minus characters At the end there must be an alphabetic designator such as com de or org The Hostname will appear in the subject line of all Notification E Mails Save your entries by clicking the Save button Note The Hostname will appear in the subject line of all Notification E I Mails to the Administrator Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS addresses a device or a VPN receiver through a DNS decryptable name The respective applicable IP address is stored for each name to a public DNS server in the Internet at each connection The device can always be reached through this name as long as it online at least A mobile user for example can access his company network through Dynamic DNS even if the company only 121 Using the Security System uses standard DSL connections with dynamic IP addresses In addition to VPN applications Dynamic DNS can also be used for remote maintenance and control Defining Dynamic DNS Servers 1In the Network tab open the Hostname DynDNS menu 2Enable the function by clicking on the Enable button in the Status column The entry window will open 127 Make the following settings Hostname In the entry field enter the hostname
161. ems no special client software PPTP is included with versions of Microsoft Windows starting with Windows 95 In order to use PPTP with this security system the client computer must support the MSCHAPv2 authentication protocol Windows 95 and 98 users must apply an update to their systems in order to support this protocol The update is available from Microsoft at http support microsoft com support kb articles Q191 5 40 ASP Select the VPN Update and if you use Windows 95 also the RAS Update PPTP VPN Access This window allows you to enable or disable PPTP VPN access by clicking the En able Disable button Logging This drop down menu allows you to choose how detailed the information recorded in the PPTP Logs should be The Extensive setting should be used when you are using the Live Log to debug connection problems When you start the connection you can view the process in real time The PPTP Live Log is in the Local Logs Browse menu Encryption This drop down menu allows you to choose between encryption strengths 40 bit or 128 bit Note that in contrast to Windows 98 and Windows ME Windows 2000 does not come with 128 bit encryption installed to use this kind of connection the High 180 Using the Security System Encryption Pack or Service Pack 2 must be installed SP2 cannot be uninstalled later Security Note You should always set Encryption to Strong 128 bit except when your network includes endpoints whic
162. en Clicking on the Disable button disables this function Block CONNECT Method on HTTP Proxy All HTTP connection requests will be blocked by the HTTP proxy Only the HTTP methods GET and PUT will be allowed through the proxy This involves that no HTTPS connections can be established Each Client Request will be introduced through the information of the method Methods define the respective action for requests The current HTTP specification offers eight methods OPTIONS GET HEAD POST PUT DELETE TRACE and CONNECT Only the GET and PUT methods are explained in this section The GET method is used with requests from a document or another 227 Using the Security System source A source in this case is defined through the request URL There are two types Conditional GET and partial GET With the conditional GET type the request of data depends on certain conditions The detail of these conditions is stored in the header field Conditional Often used conditions are for example If Modified Since If Unmodified Since or If Match This condition helps to considerably reduce network utilization since only the necessary data are forwarded In practice proxy servers for example use this function to prevent that data that are already stored in cache are forwarded several times Also the partial GET method has the same purpose It uses the range header field that only forwards parts of the data which however cannot be processed by the
163. eneenas 321 4 8 11 Executive Report sssssssssssnununnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 321 4 8 12 ACCOUNTING ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 322 4 8 13 System Information sssssssss15555555 0555 555 5 5 324 4 9 Remote Management Remote Management ssssssss 326 4 9 1 Report Manager RM cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee 326 4 10 Local Logs Log Files ccccsceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 331 4 10 1 SeCttiNGS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee sees eens esse sees aeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenee 331 4 10 2 Local Log File Query s sssssssssnsnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 335 4 10 3 BrOWSEC ou cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeauaeueeeeueeueeeeeeanes 336 4 10 3 1 LOg Files cccccccee cess ee ee eee sees eee ee ee ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 340 4 10 3 2 Error Codes cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee esse eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenanees 344 4 11 Online Help cccccceceeeeeeceee eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeees 358 4 12 Exiting the Security System ssssssusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 359 GIOSSALrY uae ee eee e eee eee eee eee eee eens eee eee 360 TING OX cae ee eee e cence cece e eee ences eee anasaidia aaa aa 367 NOTES oo cccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaneeeeueeeueeeueaeeegeeegenenenene 381 External Network Table of Contents Installation 1 Introduction to the Technology Before exploring the Novell Security Manager powered by A
164. ent In particular and without limitation these intellectual property rights may include one or more of the U S patents listed at http www novell com company legal patents and one or more additional patents or pending patent applications in the U S and in other countries Novell Inc 404 Wyman Street Suite 500 Waltham MA 02451 U S A www novell com Novell Security Manager Powered by Astaro User Guide February 25 2005 Online Documentation To access the online documentation for this and other Novell products and to get updates see www novell com documentation Novell Trademarks NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc in the United States and other countries Novell is a registered trademark of Novell Inc in the United States and other countries SUSE is a registered trademark of SUSE LINUX AG a Novell business Third Party Materials Astaro Security Linux and WebAdmin are trademarks of Astaro AG Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds All third party trademarks are the property of their respective owners Portions Astaro AG All rights reserved Pfinztalstrasse 90 76227 Karlsruhe Germany http www astaro com Portions Kaspersky Labs Table of Contents Contents Page 1 Introduction to the TechnoloG cscseeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeues 5 Z Unstallation ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeaeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeuaeeeeenaeeonanes 12 2 1 System Requirements cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
165. entry click delete Kernel Routing Table The Kernel Routing Table will be displayed in a se parate window This window shows all on the system currently active routes The system will check each rule in the order of the list using the first applicable route By default the default routes pel dap ia Ha to ml cr PO EBAn a associated with network ee e AO EE 4 cards are already entered and are not editable Rontin Table Microsoft Internet Oxphorer aw Kernel Routing Clicking on the Show button opens the Kernel Routing Table window 167 Using the Security System 4 3 4 NAT Masquerading 4 3 4 1 NAT The Network Address Translation NAT func tion translates one set of IP addresses usually private ones to addresses in an other set usually public NAT makes it possible for computers on an internal LAN to use private IP ad dresses while still allowing them to communicate through the security system with the public Internet When a client sends an IP packet to the router NAT translates the sending address to a different public IP address from the address space given by the Internet provider before forwarding the packet to the Internet When a response packet is received NAT translates the public address into the original address and forwards it on to the internal client Depending on system resources the NAT function can handle arbitrarily large internal networks
166. eport that the connection has been established f Important Note Authentication Use the drop down menu to select a service 213 Now define which IP addresses should be assigned to the hosts when connecting In the PPTP IP Pool window use the Network drop down menu to select a network The chosen network will be used immediately The PPTP Pool network is selected by default The IP address network mask and number of free addresses will appear below the drop down box Users will be assigned an address from this range automatically 214 In the PPTP Client Parameters window DNS and WINS servers for PPTP clients can be defined Two servers may be defined for each Client DNS servers Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers to use Client WINS Servers Enter the IP addresses of the Windows name servers to use Client domain Enter the DNS domain that the client should append to DNS requests 215 Save your configuration by clicking Save 183 Using the Security System The rest of the configuration takes place on the user s machine This will require the IP address of the server as well as a valid username and password These should be supplied by the security system administrator 1In Microsoft Windows 2000 open the Start Settings Network and Dialup Connections menu 2Click the Make New Connection icon The Network Connection Wizard will open Then click on the Next button 216 Select the following option Connect to a priv
167. equired The messages which are sent as SNMP Trap contain the Object ID OID The OID for messaging events 1500 the classification of the message DEBUG 0 INFO 1 WARN 2 CRIT 3 and the relevant error code 000 bis 999 are attached Example The notification INFO 354 Intrusion Protection Pat tern Up2Date succeeded Intrusion Protection Pattern Up2Date succeeded has in this case the OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 and is assigned the following string lt HOST gt INFO 354 For the wildcard lt HostT gt the hostname of the security system will be displayed Assigning the Trap Server 1Enable SNMP Traps function by clicking the Enable button The status light will show green and an advanced entry window will open 51 In the SNMP Tap Assignment table click the New Assign ment button 52 Click on the new line in the Host IP Address column An editing window will open 63 Using the Security System 53 Enter the IP address into the entry field of the server and save your entry by clicking on the Save button 54 Click on the entry public in the Community String column and enter the Community String into the entry field The new assignment will be accepted immediately 4 1 6 Remote Syslog Server This function allows you to forward log messages from the Security system to other hosts This is especially useful for net works using a log host to collect logging information from a number of different hosts By
168. er authentication daemon BD 2fites Today 2226 2 rif WebAdmin B 2fites Now 205kB E Please select X The functions from the left to the right Selection box This setting is required in connection with the drop down menu at the footer of the table Select the protocol groups and then choose the action Delete or Download as ZIP File from the drop down menu 336 Using the Security System The action will start immediately Clicking on the selection box in the header selects all protocol groups 8 Clicking on the trash can icon deletes a group from the table Name All protocols are listed in alphabetical order in this column Date The date of current protocols will not be displayed P Clicking on the folder icon opens the sub tab with all protocols of this group By clicking again on the icon you will get back to the overview The additional functions in the sub tab are described in the Log File Sub tab section File Count Name The number of existing files will be displayed in this column The old protocols can be opened from the sub tab Activity If the protocols in a group have been logged since Midnight a correspondent message will be displayed e Now The protocols are being generated right now e Today Protocols have been generated since Midnight Open the current protocol Live Log by clicking on the message Now or Today Size The size of the log file group will be displayed in this column
169. ering filters introduction local log file archive local log file query log files remote log file archive settings starting search Glossary 290 284 286 290 287 307 301 301 287 297 303 304 302 285 285 290 290 308 308 307 46 44 175 175 173 336 332 333 332 339 338 331 332 335 340 333 331 335 371 Glossary Log files error codes 344 Log Files Admin notifications 342 BIND name server 341 boot messages 340 configuration daemon 340 Configuration Manager 340 content filter 340 DHCP client 340 DHCP server 340 fallback archive 340 High Availability 341 HTTP daemon 341 HTTP proxy 342 Intrusion Protection 341 IPSec VPN 341 kernel 341 local login 341 logging 341 MiddleWare 341 network accounting deamon 341 packet filter 342 POP3 proxy 342 portscan detection 342 PPPoE DSL dial up 342 PPTP VPN access 342 selfmonitoring 342 SMTP proxy 343 SOCKS proxy 343 SSH remote login 343 system log messages 343 Up2Date Service messages 343 uplink failover messages 343 user authentication daemon 340 Virus Protection 341 WebAdmin access 341 WebAdmin usage 343 Log FTP Data Connections 217 Log Unique DNS Requests 217 Logging Options 217 372 Masquerading deleting rules editing rules introduction NAT defining rules deleting rules editing rules introduction Networks adding DNS server adding host adding network defining IPSec user group defining network group deletin
170. ertificate 309 Using the Security System Host Certificate This certificate contains the public key of the host as well as identifying information about the host such as IP address or owner The certificate is also signed by a CA verifying that the key does indeed belong to the entity named in the identification information These valid certificates are used to authenticate remote IPSec hosts user endpoints The drop down menu at the bottom of the table allows you to download certificates in various for mats or to delete certifi cates from the system PEM A format encoding the certificate in ASCII code The certificate request and private key are stored in separate files DER A binary format for encoding certificates The certificate re quest and private key are stored in separate files PKCS 12 A container file One file can contain the certificate private key and verification CA Delete Delete the specified certificate Issue CERT from CSR This function signs a CSR generating a full host certificate 310 Using the Security System Generating a Client Host Certificate Step 1 Create a Signing CA 1Under the IPSec VPN tab open the CA Management menu 2In the Certificate Authorities table click the New button The Add Certificate Authority window will open 304 Select the Generate option 305 In the Name field enter a descriptive Name for the certificate authority Allowed characters a
171. erver Note that Windows servers have a NetBIOS name the NT 2000 server name as well as an IP address 8 Disstie 1In the System tab open the User Authentication menu 68 In the SAM NT 2000 XP Server Settings window click the Enable button next to Status PDC Name Enter the name of the Domain Controller in this entry field Since beginning with Windows 2000 these names are also official DNS names only names consisting of alphanumeric minus and period characters are allowed Other characters for example _ are not allowed PDC Address Enter the IP address of the Domain Controller 72 Using the Security System BDC Name If you have a Backup Domain Controller enter its name in this entry field If you do not use a BDC enter the name of the PDC here BDC Address If you have a Backup Domain Controller enter its IP address here If you do not use a BDC enter the IP address of the PDC here NT4 Domain Enter the name of your MS Windows NT 2000 Domain Allowed characters are Letters of the alphabet hyphen and underscore characters _ Note This is not the Internet domain as in Company com but rather a simple designator e g Intranet If you are using a stand alone server rather than a Domain Controller enter its NETBIOS name here This corresponds to the PDC Name entry 69 Confirm your settings by clicking Save Security Note For the Shared Secret only passwords con
172. erver The Firewall One of the components in this security system is a firewall The characteristic tasks of a firewall connecting a WAN LAN and DMZ are e Protection against unauthorized access e Access control e Collection of audit trails e Protocol analysis e Reporting of security related events e Concealing internal network structure e Separation of servers and clients using proxies e Guaranteeing information confidentiality Installation A firewall combines several network components in order to provide these assurances The following is a brief look at some of these tools and their uses Network Layer Firewalls Packet Filters As the name suggests this component filters IP packets on the basis of source and destination address IP flags and packet payload This allows an administrator to grant or deny access to services based on factors such as e The source address e The destination address e The protocol e g TCP UDP ICMP e The port number The primary advantages of packet filters are their speed and their independence of operating systems and applications in use behind the firewall Advanced implementations of packet filters also inspect packets at higher network layers Such filters interpret transport level infor mation such as TCP and UDP headers to analyze and record all current connections This process is known as stateful inspection A stateful packet filter records the status of all connecti
173. ervers in this selection field 198 Using the Security System 4 5 Packet Filter The Packet Filter is the central part of the firewall In the Rules menu you define the allowed data traffic between the networks and hosts in the form of Packet filter rules You can also define specific packets which will never be allowed to pass through the firewall The packet filter management is done in the Rules table The tools in the ICMP menu allow you to check the network connections and functions of the security system The additional and reporting functions are available in the Advanced menu 4 5 1 Rules en i ii carter The Rules menu allows you pave to define packet filter sets of rules These rules are de fined with the help of the network and service def initions In general there are two basic kinds of packet filtering policy e Default allow the rules explicitly define which packets are blocked all others are allowed e Default deny the rules explicitly define which packets are allowed all others are dropped This security system uses a Block all packets policy as this policy is inherently much more secure This policy requires you to define expli citly which IP packets will be allowed to pass the filter All other packets will be blocked and depending on the action chosen displayed in the Packet Filter Live Log The Packet Filter Live Log can be opened in this menu by clicking on the Live Log button or
174. es User authentication with Microsoft Active Directory can also use user attributes to assign access rights For large organizations however this can be time consuming to configure 82 Using the Security System Note According to the LDAP standard each user attribute must have an associated object ID or OID Object ID numbers are designed to be unique across the entire Internet in order to manage this the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has been charged with assigning OID prefixes to organizations If your organization does not yet have an official OID space you can request an OID prefix from the IANA at www iana org Once you have an OID space you should consider how best to use it to describe your network structure Remember that each user attribute will require a unique OID In order to configure user attributes the Microsoft Management Console must be used to modify the Active Directory Schema In order to do this you must first mark the schema as editable 83 Using the Security System Step 1 Enable Editing of the Active Directory Schema 1In the Microsoft Management Console right click Active Directory Schema 2Use the left mouse button to click Operations Master The Change Schema Master window will open 82 Check the option The Schema may be modified on this Domain Controller 83 Save your changes by clicking OK The Active Directory Schema can now be edited Step 2 Add New Attributes 1
175. es incorporated into this security system transform it into an Application Gateway capable of securing vital services such as HTTP Mail and DNS Further the SOCKS proxy enables generic circuit level proxying for all proxy aware applications VPN SNAT DNAT Masquerading and static routing capabilities make the firewall a powerful connection and control point on your network 11 Installation 2 Installation The installation of this Internet security system proceeds in two main steps loading the software and configuring the system parameters The initial configuration required for loading the software is performed through the console based Installation Menu while the final con figuration and customization can be performed from your manage ment workstation through the web based WebAdmin interface CP D aon While configuring your sys tem please note that the WebAdmin system pro vides additional information and help through its Online Help system To access this system simply click the d button marked The following pages contain configuration worksheets where you can enter the data such as default gateways and IP addresses you use to set up your system We recommend you fill these out as you configure the system and that you keep the worksheets in a safe place for future reference 12 Installation 2 1 System Requirements The requirements for installing and using this
176. esponds to the bandwidth of the Internet connection on an ADSL access the Uplink bandwidth amounts to 128 kBit s and on a 2 Megabit fixed connection to 2048 kBit s Downlink Bandwidth kbits This setting will only appear if the QoS function is enabled In this entry menu enter the available bandwidth for the Downlink in full kilobits On an inter face to the Internet this value corresponds to the bandwidth of the Internet connection on an ADSL access the Uplink band width amounts to 768 kBit s and on a 2 Megabit fixed connection to 2048 kBit s MTU Size The MTU is the size in bytes of the largest trans mittable packet MTU stands for Maximum Transfer Unit For connections using the TCP IP protocol the data will be sub divided into packets A maximum size will be defined for these packets Packets larger than this value will be considered too long for the connection and fragmented into smaller ones before transmission These data packets will be sent again However the performance can be limited if the upper value is too low 153 Using the Security System The following values are the defaults for the PPP over Ethernet PPPoE DSL connection 1492 Byte 175 Confirm these settings by clicking Add The system will now check the address and network mask for semantic validity After a successful check the new interface will appear in the Current Interface Status table The interface is not yet enabled status light is red 1
177. estarted 110 configuration database server not running restarted 111 syslog server not running restarted 112 middleware not running restarted 150 Root partition mounted at is filling up please check 152 tmpfs partition mounted at opt tmpfs is filling up please check 152 secure application partition mounted at var sec is filling up please check 153 logfile partition mounted at var log is filling up please check 344 154 155 300 302 303 320 321 Using the Security System storage application partition mounted at var storag Up2Date p filling up System Up2 e is filling up please check artition mounted at var up2date is please check Date System Up2Date started Further information on the Up2Date Service can be found i n chapters on page 48 System Up2Date No new System Up2Date packages available System Up2Dat succeeded Prefetched new System Up2Date pa ckage s For more Up2Date package information please see attachted Further in found inc System Up2 Up2Date description file formation on the System Up2Date can be hapters on page 48 Date failed License is not valid System Up2Date Started System Up2Date install lation in HA Master Mode 345 Using the Security System 322 323 350 351 352 393 354 360 361 700 346 System Up2Date New System Up2Dates installed Further information
178. ettings are disabled packet filter rules can be used to allow specific IP addresses or networks to ping the firewall or internal network ICMP Forwarding This allows you to forward all ICMP packets behind the firewall This means that all IPs in the local network and in all connected DMZs can be pinged Click the Enable button to enable the function status light shows green 211 Using the Security System If you wish to disable ICMP forwarding you must ensure that the m Packet Filter Rules menu does not contain a rule of the form Any Source Any Service Any Destination Allow Action Otherwise ICMP forwarding will remain active irrespective of the setting here Important Note ICMP on Firewall The firewall directly receives and forwards all ICMP packets This is enabled by default status light shows green Click the Disable button to change disable the function status light shows red Note ICMP on firewall must be activated to use the Ping action The action is described in more detail in the Network Ping Check menu and is described in chapter on page 188 Log ICMP Redirects ICMP Redirects are sent from one router to the other in order to find a better route for a destination Router then change their routing tables and forward the following packets to the same destination on the supposed better route This function logs the ICMP Redirects Clicking on the Enable button enables the function status
179. f the switch is configured as a VLAN switch There might be wrong ARP resolutions Address Resolution Firewall Protocol ARP clash which cannot be administered by all operating systems such as those from Microsoft Therefore one physical network segment has to be used for each firewall network interface 123 Using the Security System The Interfaces menu configure and manage installed on the also all interfaces with Internet and internal networks LAN Note While planning your nei system take care to r Internet z DMZ wona TO ron tu Router 3A IANI Firewall allows you to all network cards security system and the external network interfaces to the DMZ onfiguring the security is connected to which network In most configurations the network interface with SysID eth1 is chosen as the connection to the external network In order to install the High Availability HA system the selected network cards on both systems must have the same SysID Installing the HA system is described in more detail in chapter on page 98 The following sections explain how to use the Current Interface Status and Hardware List windows to manage the various Inter face types Current Interface Status Current Interface Status Admin Oper _ Name Type Hardware List cards have been configured This window allows you to configure both logical
180. fail the administrator will receive message WAR 081 If you do not wish to use this monitoring function no further action is required After the system sends the WAR 081 message it will not try to start the link beat monitoring system again HA check interface does not support link beat check The link beat monitoring system failed after multiple attempts If you have recently in stalled the HA system and you intend to use the 158 159 711 715 Using the Security System link beat monitoring system pleas check that the network cards support link beat and that they are supported by the security system Also check to make sure that the link beat capable cards have been chosen for the data transfer connection The installation and management of the HA system is described in chapter on page 98 Interface uplink usage exceeds configured limit On a Standard Ethernet interfac th function Monitor Interface Usage was activated The maximum value for the Uplink Bandwidth was exceeded Interface uplink usage exceeds configured limit On a Standard Ethernet interfac th function Monitor Interface Usage was activated The maximum value for the Downlink Bandwidth was exceeded Log file s have been deleted The log file partition usag reached th specified value in percent Log Files have been deleted To make sure you don t lose more log file s please check the WebAdmin sett
181. fect immediately and will be saved if you leave this menu Only the HTTP proxy can be accessed from the allowed networks See also the functions in the Advanced window Parent Proxy The Parent Proxy function is required in those countries in which an Internet access is only permitted with a state controlled proxy This applies to many countries in Africa or Asia Once a Parent Proxy has been defined in this window the HTTP requests are at first sent to the relevant IP address Defining a Parent Proxy 1In the Proxies tab open the HTTP menu 2Enable the proxy by clicking the Enable button in the Parent Proxy window An advanced entry window will open 247 Define the Parent Proxy 226 Using the Security System Host Select the parent proxy server from the drop down menu Prior to this the server must be defined in the Definitions Networks menu Service Select the service from the drop down menu Prior to this the service must be defined in the Definitions Networks menu 248 Save your settings by clicking on the Save button 249 Ifan authentication is required for the Parent Proxy click on the Enable button Username Enter a user name in the entry field Password Enter the password in this entry field 250 Save your setting by clicking on the Save button Advanced Caching This function buf fers often used Websites to the HTTP Proxy Cache This is enabled by default status light shows gre
182. for DSL connections is described in the DSL Network guide Also note that once the DSL connection is activated the security system will be connected to your ISP 24 hours a day You should therefore ensure that your ISP bills on a flat rate or bandwidth based system rather than based on connection time The DSL Network guide is available at http www novell com documentation nsma51 155 Using the Security System Configuring PPTP over Ethernet PPPoA DSL 1In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu 2Click the New button to open the Add Interface window 178 In the Name entry field enter a descriptive name for the interface 179 Use the Hardware drop down menu to select a network card Tip For an external connection e g to the Internet choose the card with Sys ID eth1 You cannot choose a network card that has already been config ured with a primary network address 180 Use the Type drop down menu to select the PPTP over Ethernet PPPoA DSL connection interface type You will need the connection settings provided by your ISP to configure the following settings Address If you have not been assigned a static IP address by your provider keep the default Assigned by remote setting here If you have a static IP address choose Static from the drop down menu and enter the address in the entry field If you wish to configure the Uplink Failover on Interface function observe the description of this function
183. from 0 to 65535 inclusive Lost packets can be recognized through TCP and be requested again in a TCP connection the receiver notifies the sender when a packet is successfully received connection related protocol TCP sessions begin with a three way handshake and are torn down at the close of the session The ESP and AH protocols are used for Virtual Private Networking VPN These protocols are covered in chapter on page 280 The network table contains the defined services and groups By Default the table contains the already pre defined statically entered services 113 Using the Security System Services can be grouped into Service Groups These service groups can be used the same way single services can and can themselves be included in other service groups In the service table service groups are labeled by the group symbol B The definition of Service Groups is described on page 115 Add Service 1Under the Definitions tab open the Service menu 2Click on the New Definition button The entry window will open 115 Make the following settings Name In the entry field enter a unique Service name This name will be used later for example to configure packet filter rules Allowed characters are The only allowed characters are alphanumeric characters minus space and underscore _ Names may be up to 39 characters long Type Select Service from the drop down menu Protocol Select the Protocol from the
184. g data are treated Manual configuration of system time a Open the Settings menu in the System tab b In the Time Settings window make the following settings in the given order Use NTP Server In order to configure the system clock manually please ensure that No NTP Server is selected here In this case the Please select drop down menu will be displayed If a NTP Server is selected select No NTP Server from the drop down menu Time Zone Now select the time zone Note Changing the timezone will only change the current system time m if you are using an NTP server to control time settings Set Time Enter the current date and time here 41 Using the Security System Take note of the issue date of your License Key If this date is after the current date set on the security system the license will be deactivated Important Note The 30 day Evaluation License will not automatically activate 9 Click the Save button to save these settings The time settings of the security system will now be updated Synchronizing system time with NTP Server Before the system clock of the Internet security system can be synchronized with an external server this server must be defined as NTP Server The NTP Server will be defined as a network consisting of only one computer The definition of networks is covered in greater detail in chapter on page 105 If the NTP server has already been defined please begin with step
185. g definitions editing definitions filtering filters introduction Notification Packet Filter advanced system information Packet Filter Live Log introduction Setting Resetting filters Packet filter rule sorting rules table Packet Filter Rules adding editing groups deleting rules editing rules enable disable rules filtering filters introduction re ordering rules rules table Pattern Up2Date Glossary 173 173 172 170 172 172 168 109 107 108 110 109 112 112 111 111 106 121 214 218 218 219 205 205 205 205 205 206 206 199 205 204 373 Glossary installation automatic installation manual Phishing Mail Ping Check introduction POP3 configuring Content Filter header Spam Protection Virus Protection PPTP VPN introduction MS Windows 2000 Scenario PPTP client parameters PPTP IP pool PPTP VPN access Protocol Handling Protocols AH ESP IP TCP UDP Proxy DNS HTTP Ident introduction POP3 Proxy Content Manager SMTP SOCKS Proxy Content Manager age automatic cleanup daily spam digest deferred filtering filters 374 113 113 54 275 188 245 246 248 246 246 180 182 182 181 180 216 115 115 115 113 113 241 221 250 220 245 274 251 243 274 278 279 275 277 277 global actions mail ID permanent error quarantined recipient s sender smtp_queue Quality of Service QoS Remote Management in
186. ght click the Enable button Authentication Methods Choose RADIUS from the selection field 67 Now confirm your settings by clicking on the Add button The user authentication using RADIUS is now active The IAS service will log every access attempt in the Microsoft Windows NT 2000 Event Log In order to prevent the Windows Event Log from overflowing the security system stores RADIUS access information for five minutes This may mean that changes in the RADIUS database will not be reflected at the security system for a few minutes Attention The security system sends queries on UDP port 1812 71 Using the Security System 4 1 7 2 SAM NT 2000 XP This authentication method uses an MS Windows NT 2000 Domain Controller or standalone server Many businesses already use MS Windows NT 2000 networks based on ActiveDirectory The advantage of SAM is that it is very easy to configure if the network already has a Primary Domain Controller PDC or if a server with a user database is running The drawback however is that this system does not distinguish between different user groups You can either allow all users in an SAM database access to a proxy or none of them Configuring SAM NT 2000 XP uses In order to use this authenti cation method you will need to have a Microsoft Windows NT or 2000 server on your network that contains the user infor mation This can be either a Primary Domain Controller PDC or a standalone s
187. guration of the security system 87 Using the Security System 2 88 Security Note Make sure that the user has only read privileges In the System tab open the User Authentication menu In the LDAP Server Settings window enable the system by clicking Enable next to Status LDAP Type Choose the type of LDAP server to use The available choices are Microsoft Active Directory Novell eDirectory and OpenLDAP Unique User Attribute This attribute defines how users should be authenticated on the LDAP server The attributes available here depend on the type of LDAP server you are configuring If you wish to use a self defined attribute for authentication select Selfdefined here With the Microsoft Active Directory server you can also choose to authenticate by User Principle Name UPN or saMAccountName The Novell eDirectory and OpenLDAP servers allow authentication by the Common Name CN Surname SN and Unique Identifier UID attributes Attribute Name This entry field is only shown if you have selected to au thenticate by a Selfdefined attribute from the Unique User Attribute drop down menu Enter the attribute to use for authentication here IP Address Enter the IP address of the LDAP server TCP Port Enter the TCP port of the LDAP service By default this is set to 389 the standard port for LDAP Using the Security System Bind DN The value to enter here depends on the type of LDAP server
188. h cannot support this Authentication Use this drop down menu to select an authenti cation method If you have defined a RADIUS server in the Sys tem User Authentication menu you can use RADIUS authenti cation here as well The configuration of the Microsoft IAS RADIUS server and the configuration of RADIUS within WebAdmin is described in chapter on page 66 The PPTP Live Log provides a list of important events including error messages related to the PPTP service The Logging menu can be used to select which events are logged PPTP IP Pool This menu is used to define 10 70 171 0 which IP addresses PPTP hosts should be assigned The default settings assign addresses from the private IP space 10 x x x This network is called the PPTP Pool and can be used in all of the other security system configuration options If you wish to use a different network simply change the definition of the PPTP Pool or assign another defined network as PPTP Pool here 255 255 255 0 253 PPTP users are defined in the Definitions Users menu It is also possible to assign specific users to specific IP addresses These addresses do not need to be part of the defined PPTP pool To use these addresses in other parts of the system configuration such as 181 Using the Security System the packet filter they must be defined as single hosts i e networks with netmask 255 255 255 255 or as a part of a larger network Note If you use p
189. he installation will report the error and abort Time and Date Step 4 Use the Cursor keys to select your country and press Enter to confirm Use the Cursor keys to select your time zone and press Enter to continue 17 Installation 18 Next enter the current time and date in the entry field Use Tab and the Cursor keys to switch between entry fields Invalid entries will be rejected Confirm your entries with the Enter key Network Card Selection and Configuration Step 5 In order to use the WebAdmin tool to configure the rest of your security system you must now configure a card to be the in ternal network card ethO Choose one of the available network cards from the list and confirm your selection with the Enter key Next define the IP address network mask and default gateway for this network card Example Address 192 168 2 100 Netmask 255 255 255 0 You must enter a value in the Gateway field if you wish to use the WebAdmin interface from a workstation outside the subnet defined by the netmask Note that the gateway itself must be within the subnet For example if you are using a network mask of 255 255 255 0 the subnet is defined by the first three values of the address in this case 192 168 2 If your administration computer is at for example 192 168 10 5 it is not on the same subnet and thus requires a gateway to be configured here The gateway router must have an interface on the 192 168 2
190. he Parameters column Configuring a Wireless LAN Station 1In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu 2Click on the New button The Add Interface window will open 158 In the Name entry field enter a descriptive name for the interface 159 Use the Hardware drop down menu to select the Wireless LAN network card 160 Use the Type drop down menu to select the Wireless LAN Station interface type 142 Using the Security System 161 Fill in the required settings for the Wireless LAN Station Address Assign an IP address for the station If you wish to use a static IP address for this interface select Static from the drop down menu and enter the address to use in the entry field If you wish to have a gateway dynamically assigned via DHCP select Assign by DHCP from the drop down menu Netmask If you wish to use a statically defined network mask for this interface use the drop down menu to select Static and enter the netmask to use in the entry field If you wish to have a netmask dynamically assigned via DHCP select Assign by DHCP from the drop down menu Default Gateway If you wish to use a statically defined default gateway use the drop down menu to select Static and enter the address of the gateway in the entry field If you wish to have a gateway dynamically assigned via DHCP select Assign by DHCP from the drop down menu Otherwise select None SSID Enter the network name for the wireless network here If you wish
191. he RM Log Files to the Report Manager you can also generate the RM Log Files for the historic log file archive and download them to a local computer This chapter describes the functions and settings contained in the RM menu Depending on the existing network topology and the adjusted Report Manager Network architecture some settings must be made for the integration of the Remote Management Tool Possible Report Manager Network architectures are e Local RM Architecture e Centralized RM Architecture e Large Scale RM Architecture 326 Using the Security System The layout and the installation of those RM Network Architectures are described in the RM NSMA5 Integration Guide j The installation of the software and the required settings to B connect the Report Manager to the Novell Security Manager powered by Astaro security system are described in RM NSMAS Integration Guide The way to use the Report Manager is described in the associated manuals The guides and manuals are available at http www novell com documentation nsma51 Report Manager RM Status Clicking on the Enable button enables the interface to the Report Manager and the functions to generate RM Log Files status light green Licensed IP Address This entry field will be displayed once you have enabled the function in the Status line The scope of the license of the Report Manager depends on the amount of connected security systems Those security systems are
192. he Security System 60 61 62 63 70 For every proxy enter a rule Choose a descriptive name such as HTTP access Add two conditions 1 Condition 1 The NAS Identifier field must correspond to a string from the following table Proxy Type NAS Identifier String HTTP http L2TP over IPSec I2tp PPTP pptp SOCKS socks SMTP smtp WebAdmin Access webadmin Surf Protection Profilname 2 Condition The Windows group of the user must match the group established in step 2 Access is granted only when both conditions are met Edit the profile so that only an encrypted connection is allowed by disabling the No Encryption function in the Encryption register Edit the profile so that an unencrypted authentication is allowed by disabling the Encrypted Authentication PAP function in the Authentication register Leave the other values unchanged Open the WebAdmin configuration tool and open the User Authentication menu in the System tab In the RADIUS Server Settings window click the Enable button next to Status the status light will show green Using the Security System Address or Hostname Enter the IP address or the host name of the RADIUS server Shared Secret Enter the Shared Secret from step 6 64 Click the Save button to save these settings 65 In the Proxies tab open the menu corresponding to the proxy service you wish to use 66 If User Authentication is not enabled red status li
193. he System tab 2 In the Restore a Backup window next to the Upload Backup File entry field click on the Browse button 27 In the File Upload window choose the Backup file you would like to load and click on the Open button 56 Using the Security System Note When using Microsoft Windows make sure not to use a UNC Path for loading the backup Select the Backup file with the help of the Look in selection window 28 Click on the Start button If during the generation of the backup file the Encryption function was enabled the Enter Passphrase window will open 29 In the Passphrase field enter the password 30 Confirm your settings by clicking Start The security system will now load and check the backup file If the ckecksums are correct you will now receive the Backup Information 31 Check the Backup Information 32 To import the backed up settings into the active system click the Start button When the message Backup has been restored successfully appears the process has completed successfully 57 Using the Security System Create a Backup This window allows you to create and archive a backup file of the configuration of your Security system Manually Creating a Backup 1 Open the Backup menu in the System tab 2 In the Create a Backup window in the Comment field enter a description of this backup When restoring system backups this description will be dis played to help distinguish betwee
194. he safest solution is if only one administrator PC has access to the Internet security system through HTTPS Networks can be defined in the Definitions Networks menu Authentication Methods Select the authentication method in the selection field In order to give you access to the Internet security system through the configurations tool WebAdmin after the installation the authentication method Local Users has already been defined here and the respective User hase been entered in the Allowed Users selection menu Further available authentication methods are NT 2000 XP Server RADIUS Database and LDAP Server Local Users are administered in the Definitions Users menu Allowed Users By default this is set to the user admin Local users are defined in the Definitions Users menu Log Access Network Traffic All connections to the WebAdmin configuration tool are logged to the Packet Filter Logs as Accept 93 Using the Security System rule The Packet Filter Logs can be found in the Local Logs Browse menu By default this function is disabled Enable this function by clicking on the Enable button status light on green Block Password Guessing This function can be used to limit the number of at tempts to log in to the WebAdmin configuration tool After a specific num ber of attempts the access from this IP address will be denied for a given time span Configuring the Blocking Protection for Login Attempts 1In the Sy
195. his purpose Default Kernel for systems with a CPU SMP Kernel for systems with several processors Classic Kernel for systems with a CPU in which the support for APIC Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller and ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface is disabled Since in older hardware components APIC and ACPI are often not supported we recommend using the Classic Kernel in this case Installation Key Functions during the Installation Step 1 In order to navigate through the menus use the following keys Please note the additional key functions listed in the green bar at the bottom of the screen Cursor keys Use these keys to navigate through the text boxes e g the license agreement or when selecting a keyboard layout Enter key The entered information is confirmed and the instal lation proceeds to the next step ESC key Abort the installation Tab key Move between text boxes entry fields and buttons Press Enter to continue Attention The installation will destroy all data on the PC Confirm the following security question by clicking the F8 key Keyboard Layout Step 2 Use the Cursor keys to select your keyboard layout and press Enter to continue Hardware Detection Step 3 The software will check the following hardware requirements CPU size and type of hard drive CD ROM drive network cards and IDE or SCSI controllers If your system does not meet the minimum requirements t
196. hosts that should be allowed to use the proxy All settings take effect immediately and will be saved if you leave this menu SOCKS Proxy with User Authentication If you have enabled the User Authentication function proxy users must use a username and password to log into the SOCKS proxy Because only SOCKSv5 supports User Authentication SOCKSv4 is automatically disabled The Authentication Methods selection menu allows you to select the user authentication method to be used Only those authentication methods you have configured in the Settings User Authentication menu are available here If you choose to use the Local Users method you can select which local users may access the SOCKS Proxy Local Users are managed in the Definitions Users menu 244 Using the Security System 4 6 4 POP3 POP3 stands for Post Office Protocol 3 This is a protocol which allows the retrieval of e mails from a mail server POP3 is the logical opposite of SMTP SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol This protocol is used to deliver e mails to a mail server This menu allows you to configure the POP3 Proxy for incoming e mails The POP3 proxy works transparently requiring no configuration on the client side POP3 requests coming from the internal network on port 110 are intercepted and redirected through the proxy This process is not visible to the client The advantage of this mode is that no additional administration or
197. ic recipient address 284 Click the Apply Filters button to start the filter In this case only the filtered e mails will be displayed in the table Once the menu has been left all protocols will be displayed again Automatic Cleanup In order to save disk space on the security system you can use this option to delete e mails automatically Enable the function by clicking the Enable button in the Status line status light shows green Mode Configure the mode in this drop down menu The following modes are available e Cleanup by message age This mode deletes all old e mails from a certain age on Enter the maximum age in days into the Maximum Message Age days entry field e Cleanup by message count As soon as there is a specific amount of e mails older e mails will be deleted By default this is set to 500 e mails It shouldn t be configured to less than 200 Save the settings by clicking on the Save button The action will then be executed once per hour so that the maximum level is only exceeded for short periods 278 Using the Security System Daily Spam Digest This Daily Spam Digest function causes the system to send a daily digest of the proxy content manager to the internal recipients by e mail informing them which incoming emails have been i IR A a eS N N put into quarantine within Subject Yesterday s daly digest of suspected spam on my2 cooLma Fam TT MeRa saat Pte sf t the last 24 h
198. icient path Strictly speaking a gateway is not always a router it could be an application gateway or proxy though a router is a kind of circuit level gateway When a computer wants to communicate with a server not on the local network it must pass the data to a router in order for the packets to be forwarded to their destination By convention the highest or lowest address in the network range is used for the router for example in the network 192 168 179 0 24 the router will normally be at either 192 168 179 254 or 192 168 179 1 Server A server is a network connected computer that offers services to client computers Standard services include WWW FTP news and so on In order to make use of these services the user will need a client program e g Netscape to communicate with the server SOCKS SOCKS is a proxy protocol that allows a point to point connection between an internal and an external computer SOCKS often called the Firewall Traversal Protocol is currently at version 5 and must be implemented in the client side program in order to function correctly 365 Glossary Subnet Mask The subnet mask also called netmask of a network together with the network address defines which addresses are part of the local network and which are not Individual computers will be assigned to a network on the basis of the definition UNC Path The Universal Naming Convention path is used primarily by computers running a M
199. icrosoft operating system to uniquely designate network resources UNC paths are usually of the form Server Resource 366 Index Accounting adding deleting a network card introduction Acoustic signals beep 5 times administrator e mail addresses Backup editing e mail addresses encryption of e mail backup file generating e mail backup file introduction load manual creation Broadcast Internet wide segment wide Browser MS Explorer disabling proxy use Browser Netscape disabling proxy use Connection Tracking Helpers introduction loading helper modules Connection Tracking Table Current System NAT Rules Current System Packet Filter Rules DHCP Server assigning DNS servers Gateway IP and WINS server configuring current IP leasing table introduction DNS configuring Dynamic DNS defining Host Glossary 187 186 105 39 209 210 222 221 214 215 219 219 219 177 176 179 176 242 122 367 Glossary introduction Error codes CRIT INFO WARN Errors causes Exit Factory Reset Firewall Hostname General System Settings Glossary broadcast client client server model DNS dual homed gateway firewall header host ICMP IP IP address masquerading nslookup port protocol proxy RADIUS router server SOCKS subnet mask UNC path Glossary Header High Availability introduction High Availability System 368 20 121 352 344 350 126
200. identified by means of your IP address Enter the IP address of the network card through which the log files are sent to the RM Syslog Server into the entry field Once you have entered a valid IP address the RM Log Files are generated automatically during the Log File Rotation process the next night Those log files can then be downloaded manually to a local computer or sent automatically to a host via the functions of the other windows Here there are no Live Logs for RM log files 327 Using the Security System Historical RM Log Files With this function the security system gener ates special Historical Log Files which can be imported and evaluated by the Report Manager Download historical RM logs Generate Historical RM Logs By clicking on the Start button all daily log files from the archive are comprised in one Historical Log File a A The generation process is Morging log file archivas into ARM log fils Er displayed in the ARM Log EN VERAN File Merger window This apace Da l aasaes 94 72 process is successful if only JOR a ae the arm merge all plI fin ished exiting message is displayed in this window If 005 02 ara20050216 x 005 02 ax20080217 2 ease the process finished unsuc REE cessfully the reason for the Ce ects interruption is displayed a next to the message such as not enough free space available exiting if there was not enough memory on the har
201. ies to connect with several ports on the destination computer If it is successful the tool displays the relevant ports as open and the attacker has the necessary information showing him which network services are available on the destination computer The following is an example of the information returned by a port scanner Interesting ports on 10 250 0 114 The 1538 ports scanned but not shown below are in state closed Port State Service 25 tcpopen smtp 135 tcp open loc serve 139 tcp filtered netbios ssn 445 tcp open Microsoft ds 1032 tcp open iad3 Since 65535 ports are available for the TCP and UDP Internet protocols the ports are scanned at very short intervals When the firewall detects an unusually large number of attempts to connect to services especially when these attempts come from the same source address this is almost certainly due to a portscan PSD watches for such scans and immediately informs the adminis trator via e mail when one is detected The administrator can also decide what further measures should be taken in response to the scan The e mail address of the administrator can be configured in the System Settings menu 191 Using the Security System Security Note The administrator should take special care that all systems have the most recent security patches installed The Up2Date service which updates the security system itself is detailed in chapter on page 48 Notification Levels If th
202. in the NAT Rules table list The further functions in the NAT table can now be used for further customization Further Functions 171 Using the Security System Edit rule Click edit to load the rule into the Edit NAT Rule window The rule can now be changed as desired Delete rule Click Delete to remove a rule from the list 4 3 4 2 Masquerading Masquerading is a special case of SNAT which allows you to associate many internal private addresses with one external public address This allows you to hide internal IP addresses and network information from the outside network The differences between Masquerading and SNAT are e Masquerading requires a source network It will automatically include all services ports on that network e The translation only occurs when the packet is sent via the supplied network card The new source address will be that of the interface Masquerading is intended to hide privately addressed LANs behind one official public Internet address 172 Using the Security System Defining Masquerading rules To define masquerading rules select which network should masquer ade as which network card Normally the external network card is used Note In order for clients from the defined network to build a connection to the Internet the appropriate rules must be entered in the Packet Filter Rules menu More information on setting packet filter rules can be found in chapter on p
203. ings and or remove old log files manually The deleted files and or directories ar listed in the attachment Remote log file storage failed The daily log file archive could not be stored on the configured remot server Pleas check the WebAdmin settings for Local Logs Settings Remote log file archive 351 Using the Security System 850 851 CRIT 301 302 352 The archive file will be automatically re transfered with the next daily log file archive Intrusion Protection Event A packet was identified that may be part of an intrusion The matching rule classified this as medium priority level Further information on the Intrusion Prevention event can be found in the notification e mail Intrusion Protection Event Event buffering activated A packet was identified that may be part of an intrusion The matching rule classified this as medium priority level Event buffering has been activated Further Intrusion Protection events will be collected and sent to you when the collection period has expired If more events occur this period will be increased Further information on the Intrusion Prevention event can be found in the notification e mail System Up2Date failed Could not connect to Authentication Server s The authentication server is not reachable If the problem continues please contact the sup port department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Do
204. internal LAN from another network e g the public Internet All traffic between the two passes through the firewall where it is controlled and monitored Header In general the header is the information contained at the top of a file or message and consists of low level data regarding the status and handling of the file or message In particular the header of an e mail or Usenet message contains information such as the sender recipient and date Host In a client server architecture the host is the computer which runs the server software One host can have multiple server programs running on it that is an FTP server mail server and web server can all run on the same host A user uses a client program for instance a browser to access the server on the host The word Server is also often used to refer to the computer on which the server software runs diluting the distinction between server and host in practice In telecommunications the host is the computer from which information such as FTP files news or WWW pages is retrieved On the Internet hosts are often also called nodes 361 Glossary Using an Internet host as opposed to a Localhost for example with Telnet one can work from a distance Remote Access ICMP Next to the IP Protocol there is an option with specific functions The Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is a special kind of IP protocol used to send and receive information about the ne
205. ion for the entry of this network Important Note Default Gateway Keep the default setting Assigned by remote Potential further settings are Static and None Username Enter the user name which you have received from your provider Password Enter the password which you have received from your provider Init String Enter the string to initialize the modem into the entry field Remember that it might become necessary to adjust the Init String to the modem In this case the Init String can be gathered from the associated modem manual If you do not have the required documentation available enter ATZ into the entry field Dial String Enter ATDT plus the phone number into the entry field Example ATDT5551230 Reset String Enter the Reset String for the modem into the entry field Remember here as well that it might be necessary to adjust the Reset String to the modem In this case you can gather it from the associated modem manual If you do not have the required documentation available enter ATZ into the entry field Flow Control This function is used to control the data flow If the data are transferred via the serial connection it might happen 161 Using the Security System 162 that the system cannot process incoming data fast enough To ensure that no data are lost this method of controlling the data flow becomes necessary With the serial connection to methods are available Hardware signals Software signa
206. is allows you to work with the names you define rather than struggling with addresses ports and network masks Another advantage is that you can group individual networks and services together and configure them all at once If at a later date you assign certain settings to these groups they will apply to all networks and services contained therein It is even possible to make groups of groups Local users for the proxy services can also be defined here 4 2 1 Networks In the Networks menu the hosts and networks and also the network groups are defined The network table contains static networks which have been pre defined By default the table contains next to the definitions for the internal network card ethO additional statically entered networks These statical networks cannot be edited or removed The hosts and networks can be grouped together These groups will be treated as individual hosts and networks and can belong to an upstream group The network types are represented by symbols The following pages contain a description of the different network types available and of how they are defined 106 Using the Security System The network types are represented by symbols The Symbols Icon Column __ Display Setting Network type Host Server network tyre network Cl Newwork type ons sever Adding Host 1Under the Definitions tab open the Networks menu 2Click on the New Definition button 3The
207. isplays how often a rule from the group became active Info This column provides short information on this IPS rule group The IPS Rule Sub tab All IPS rules of a group are listed in this sub tab The sub group can be opened in the overview by clicking on the folder icon P 0 Rules for Distributed Denial of Service 0 Rules for DNS protocol 0 Denial of Service attacks Intrusion Protection Rules Total 2491 entries 2471 filtered 20 shown New Rule 7 7 Filters 7 0 Rules for DNS protocol 0 B DNS EXPLOIT x86 Linux overflow attempt ID 262 B Quw DNS named version attempt ID 257 7 DNS SPOOF query response with TTL of 1 min and no authority ID 254 7 Qeew DNS named authors attempt ID 1435 i DNS EXPLOIT sparc overflow attempt ID 267 GD DNS zone transfer UDP ID 1948 The functions in the sub tab from the left to the right 2208 Clicking on the status light enables the IPS rule te 7 9 The IPS rule can be configured as alarm rule Intrusion Detection or as blocking rule Intrusion Prevention Clicking on the icon switches the application of the IPS rule in this group Return to the overview by clicking on the folder icon Group The name of the IPS group of rules is displayed in this column Hits This column displays how often a rule from the group became active Info The first line provides short information on this IPS rule group You can obtain detailed information on the IPS rules by clicki
208. ith encryption normally the following algorithms are used e Triple Data Encryption Standard 3DES e Advanced Encryption Standard AES Of these AES offers the highest standard of security The effective key lengths that can be used with AES are 128 192 and 256 Bits This security system supports a number of encryption algorithms Either the MD5 or SHA 1 algorithms can be used for authentication Key Management The secure generation management and distribution of keys is crucial to the security of IPSec connections IPSec supports both manual and automatic key distribution Manual key distribution requires that both sides of the connection be configured by hand This means that for every Security Association SA there are two per tunnel a Security Parameter Index SPI must be selected a key for encryption and authenti cation must be generated and the keys must be installed on both sides of the tunnel These keys should also be changed at regular intervals Clearly manual distribution is labor intensive Because of the com plexity of the process manual intervention intensifies the risk that an unauthorized party gains access to the keys For these reasons Manual Key Distribution is not often used The Internet Key Exchange IKE protocol provides IPSec with automatic key management capabilities Keys are automatically generated and securely exchanged IKE also allows the generation and management of multiple VPN tunnels and
209. iv var iog Jew nanio 317104 16509 65393 2V tap now 1mo RO n muta rose 670 0 0 0 0 oF Su Apro 0 00 kjournaid rost 187 0 0 0 3 1808 308 S Apel 1 05 sbin syslog mg ete syslog ng root 7847 0 0 1 0 4148 2672 7 S 00 00 6 00 _ Ause Bin perl use iocal bin rot 749 0 0 LO 4144 2672 7 S 00 09 0 00 _ use ban perd use locel bin Kost 7549 0 0 Ak 4786 3066 7 S 00 09 6 00 _ usk bin peri ust iocal bin i root 7550 0 0 2 1 719 S416 3 00 00 6 00 _ use min peri Reet 7SS1 0 0 1 3 200 3508 7 S 00 00 01 _ use ein peri rot 7552 0 0 Ad 4752 2068 7 s 00 09 00 _ use ein pexi root 7553 0 0 11 4744 30 3 00 09 00 _ usk ein pexl usr iocal bin y rot 7554 0 0 1 3 S196 2512 7 3 00 09 01 _ fuse ban perd ust iocai bin i rot 7555 0 0 1 3 4904 M16 7 3 00 00 0 00 _ usr bin perl usr local bin i rost 7556 0 0 2 2 7300 S882 S 00 00 0 00 _ use bin perl use local bin t root 4240 0 0 2 1396 516 S ApeOl 0 00 ust sbin eron root S03 0 0 0 3 4040 982 7 S Ape l 0 00 fust sbin asha 4 f ete ssh sstx ton OO 0 9 900 2332 7 S Apto 01 fuse sdin hrted E ere mrtpasne root 1699 0 0 0 1 1236 44 S Aptos 6100 _ Min iogger t https p iocait wwrun 16690 0 0 0 9 300 2396 7 S APES 00 _ use edin tegi ercmrepty weerun 25974 0 2 6 7 20056 17400 gt S Oba OOl _ ver wte index tpl weerun 24473 9 0 1 1 5700 2944 7 3 Opa 00 _ usK ebin mreps ecc mrepd wn 25872 0 0 2 2 12724 6240 7 R 4050
210. kBit s Downlink Bandwidth kbits These settings will only appear if the QoS function is enabled In this entry menu enter the available bandwidth for the Downlink in full kilobits On an inter face to the Internet this value corresponds to the bandwidth of the Internet connection on an ADSL access the Uplink band width amounts to 768 kBit s and on a 2 Megabit fixed connection to 2048 kBit s MTU Size The MTU is the size in bytes of the largest trans mittable packet MTU stands for Maximum Transfer Unit For connections using the TCP IP protocol the data will be sub divided into packets A maximum size will be defined for these packets Packets larger than this value will be considered too long for the connection and fragmented into smaller ones before transmission These data packets will be sent again However the performance can be limited if the upper value is too low The following values are the defaults for the PPP over Ethernet PPPoA DSL connection 1460 Byte Confirm these settings by clicking Add The system will now check the address and network mask for semantic validity After a successful check the new interface will appear in the Current Interface Status table The interface is not yet enabled status light is red Enable the interface by clicking the status light 159 Using the Security System The interface is now enabled status light shows green The Oper column will at first show that the interfa
211. king on the field with the entry e g Default Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an old entry click Cancel Domain Enter the domain into this field Open the editing window by clicking on the field with the entry e g Default Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an old entry click Cancel Sub domain Inclusion Clicking on the message in this column allows you to integrate the sub domains into the group 253 Using the Security System Adding and editing domains 1To enter a Blank Domain into the table click on the New Domain button Then you can edit the Domain line 268 Inthe text entry field Group enter a descriptive name for the domain group 269 Enter the domain into the Domain field 270 If the sub domains are included in the group click on the Subdomain inclusion field The Profiles and Domain Group Assignment table The following picture shows two Domain Profiles Profiles and domain group assignment Total 2 entries New profile 1 arketing MailServer Address 0 entries Use Deny 5SPFfail Use He Verify Verify RBLs RCPT check BATY Sreytistine recipient sender Hacks a 2 Reseller u Use MX records 0 entries Use Deny SPHfaH Use Use erty erty Haee The functions from the left to the right are Domain Groups This field allows you to select the Group Name from the Domain Groups table Route Target All e mails for this domain group must be forw
212. kup File a Open the Backup menu in the System tab b In the Advanced window enable the Send Backups by E Mail function by clicking on the Enable button The Backups by E Mails function is enabled if the status light shows green If the Encryption function has been enabled the backup file I will be encrypted with either the DES or 3DES algorithms and can only be read or loaded using the correct password Important Note 43 Use the Interval drop down menu to define how often backups should be made The available choices are Daily weekly and monthly 44 In the E Mail to field enter the e mail addresses which should receive the backup files in regular intervals 45 Click the Add button next to the E Mail to entry field to add this address to the ordered list If you would like to add more addresses repeat step 5 46 If you wish to generate and send a backup file immediately click the Start button next to Send backup now 47 Check the generated files for readability by importing the respective backup file and clicking on the Start button The security system will now load and check the backup file If the ckecksums are correct you will now receive the Backup Information 61 Using the Security System 48 Abort the restore process by opening a different menu within the tab Editing E Mail Addresses Please see chapter on page 34 for a description of how to use the ordered list 4 1 5 SNMP The Simple Ne
213. l Compatible Regular Expressions Action This drop down menu allows you to select the action the proxy should take upon finding a message with a filtered string The following actions are possible e Reject The message will be bounced back to the sender with a 5xx error message The bounce message sent to the sender will also contain an explanation of why the message was blocked e Blackhole The e mail will be accepted and silently dropped e Quarantine The e mail will be accepted but kept in quarantine The e mail will be displayed in the Proxy Content Manger menu with the status Quarantine This menu presents further options including options to read or send a mail securely e Pass The e mail will be treated by the filter but allowed to pass A Header will be added to the e mail by which it can be sorted or filtered on the mail server or in the e Mail programs of the recipient A description of how the rules are created in Microsoft Outlook 2000 can be found on page 268 Expressions Enter the strings to filter in this list 264 Using the Security System The function of the Control List is identical to the Ordered List and described in chapter on page 34 4 6 6 2 Spam Protection 4 This option heuristically checks incoming e mail for characteristics suggestive of spam This system uses an internal database of heuris tic tests and characteristics making the test independent from sender information and also more
214. l to the administrator through the e mail addresses entered into the ordered list At least one e mail address must be present otherwise the E Mail Reporting function will be disabled To add a new e mail address enter it in the entry field and click Add Please see chapter on page 34 to learn more about the functions of the ordered list Important Note Notification E Mails can only be sent to the administrator when the DNS Proxy is enabled and configured chapter on page 241 or when the SMTP menu chapter on page 251 has been configured with a route for incoming e mails Use external Indicators This option is only available on appliance systems with an attached LCD indicator This option allows you to turn the LCD display on or off Time Settings 39 Using the Security System This menu can be used to set the time and date of the secur ity system The date and time can be set manually with the help of the drop down menu or can be automatically synchronized using the NTP server Network Time Protocol Please note that important changes in the time setting will appear as gaps in the Reporting and Logging We do not recommend changing the system time for daylight savings I time Instead we recommend setting the system clock to Central European Time CET In summer this corresponds to a deviation of less than one hour Important Note When system time settings are changed the following time warp effects m
215. lent Privacy This encryption method is based on the RC4 cipher and uses a secret string to encrypt and decrypt messages Activating WEP requires this secret key to be configured on all interfaces on the wireless network All transmissions over the network are encrypted with this key at the sending station and then decrypted at the receiving station Without this key the data cannot be decrypted This security system can also use WEP for Authentication A computer attempting to connect to the network which is not con figured with the correct key will be dropped at the access point The Wireless LAN Access Point mode also allows stations to be selectively granted access to the network on the basis of MAC Ad dress Normally in the interest of flexibility a wireless LAN will allow any new node onto the network as long as it is configured with the correct WEP settings An administrator may choose however to control which nodes should have access Such a filter can be con figured to allow only certain nodes for instance the one identified by MAC address 00 04 76 26 65 4C onto the network When a new node attempts to join the network the security system will check its MAC address if the hardware address is in the list of allowed nodes it will be permitted to join otherwise the connection will be dropped This security system supports two kinds of MAC address filter negative and positive A negative filter allows all hardware ad dres
216. les HTTP daemon The log files for the HTTP daemon belong to the support logs and will only be displayed after clicking on the show support logs button WebAdmin access The requests to the user data base are recorded to these log files Intrusion Protection The activities of the Intrusion Protection System IPS are recorded to these log files IPSec VPN Extensive information on the configuration of the IPSec VPN and L2TP over IPSec connections is recorded to these log files And also information on the Key Exchange and Encryption Virus Protection The activities of the Virus Protection System are recorded to these log files Kernel The Kernel logs record the system status including mes sages from device drivers messages relating to the boot process and information about blocked packets Logging The local archives of the log files on the Internet security system and the forwarding of files to the Remote Log File Archive are recorded to these log files Local login Information on the log in processes to the local console is recorded to these log files MiddleWare The activities of the MiddleWare are recorded to these log files The log files belong to the support logs and will only be displayed after clicking on the show support logs button Network accounting daemon The efficiency of the accounting is recorded to these log files BIND name server The releases of host names to IP addresses are recorded to these log files
217. lete Restart can take up to 5 minutes Restart 1Under the System tab open the Shut down Restart menu 2In the action drop down menu choose Restart 3Begin the reboot by clicking Start 4When asked Do you really want to restart click OK The action Shut down allows you to shut the system down and allows you to cleanly stop all running services For systems without a monitor or LCD display the end of the shut down process is signaled by an unending series of beeps at one second intervals Depending on your hardware and configuration this process can take up to 5 minutes Only after the system has completely shut down signaled by the Power down message should you turn off the power If the system is turned off without being shut down properly the system must check the consistency of the file system this means that the next boot will take longer In the worst case data may be lost The system will beep five times in a row to signal a successful startup Shut down 1Under the System tab open the Shut down Restart menu 2In the Action drop down menu choose the Shut down action 3Begin the shutdown by clicking Start 4When asked Do you really want to shut down click OK 4 2 Networks and Services Definitions 105 Using the Security System The Definitions tab allows you to define networks and services for all of the other configuration menus e g the packet filter VPN proxies etc in one central location Th
218. light is green Please check if the packet filter rules in the Packet Filter Rules menu are configured such that the CRL Distribution Server can be accessed Strict CRL Policy Any partner certificate without a corresponding CRL will be rejected Enable the function by clicking on the Enable button status light is green 315 Using the Security System Send ICMP Messages If a data packet exceeds a set MTU value the system will send the following ICMP message to the source ad dress Destination unreachable fragmentation needed This allows for the use of Path MTU Discovery IKE debug Flags This selection field allows you to configure the scope of IKE debugging logs The IKE Debugging function must be enabled in the IPSec VPN Connections menu The following flags can be logged e State Control control messages on the IKE status e Encryption encryption and decryption operations e Outgoing IKE content of outgoing IKE messages e Incoming IKE content of incoming IKE messages e Raw Packets message in unprocessed bytes MTU Enter a the MTU value in this entry field By default the MTU value is already defined 1420 Byte 316 Using the Security System 4 8 System Management Reporting The Reporting function provides current information about the sys tem the state of various subsystems and real time information about various reporting functions The displayed values are updated every five minutes The diagrams
219. logy or protocols used In order to use this directory service you will need an MS Windows NT 2000 Domain Controller Novell eDirectory Novell Directory Service 8 is an X 500 based index service designed to manage users access rights and other network resources eDirectory is available for Netware versions 5 and higher MS Windows NT 2000 Linux and Solaris The OpenLDAP Foundation the group which manages the Open LDAP open source project has released the Stand Alone LDAP server called SLAPD OpenLDAP can also be used to build a networked directory service with various other LDAP servers For instance the iPlanet Directory Server from Sun Microsystems is based on OpenLDAP code and fully compatible 77 Using the Security System User Authentication LDAP uses the Distinguished Name DN of a user to identify him or her This name must be unique within the directory Microsoft Active Directory AD and Novell eDirectory NDS8 give every object a defined DN This DN identifies the object uniquely in the AD index or NDS tree This DN is composed of the Common Name CN and Domain Component DC Example CN Administrator CN Users DC example DC com MS Active Directory also allows for user authentication by User Principal Name UPN This name consists of the login name and DNS name of the domain Example admin example com OpenLDAP simply uses the Common Name CN to identify users Please make certain that every user has
220. lowed networks and Internal Broadcast i p internal MNetwon allowed users are assigned to the functions and services Adding Objects to the Selected List 1 In the Available list select the object e g the network or user you wish to add by clicking its name You can select more than one object at a time by holding the CTRL key while you make your selection 2 Click the Left Arrow button 31 Installation The names you selected in the Available window will be moved to the Selected window Removing Objects from the Selected List 1In the Selected list choose the objects networks or users you wish to remove by clicking them Again you can select more than one object at a time by holding the CTRL key while you make your selection 3 Click the Right Arrow button The objects will be moved back to the Available window 3 3 3 The Selection Table Use the selection table to assign the corresponding au thentication method or an interface to the functions and services r Wail Server Pir ke The authentication method ASNT ens Syeter User Aa E local Tea thentication and the inter faces Menu Network Interfaces must first be configured by the administrator The picture above shows a selection table for interfaces The picture below shows a table for the selection of authentications The functions with the entries The functions are only activated if the corresponding entry has been
221. ls Since in a PPP connection all 8 bits are used for the data trans fer line and the transferred data contain the bytes of the com mand signs Control S and Control Q we recommend keeping the default setting Hardware and using a serial connection cable Line Speed Set the speed in bits per seconds for the con nection between the security system and the modem Common values are 57600 Bits s and 115200 Bits s Uplink Failover on Interface This function will only be dis played if in the Default Gateway drop down menu the setting Assigned by remote or Static has been selected With an interface to the Internet you can set up a failover by means of a second Internet connection e g via the serial interface and a PPP modem A failover for the Internet connection can for example consist of a permanent line and of an access via the serial interface If the primary connection fails the uplink will automatically be set up through the backup Internet access In order to monitor the connection the Primary Interface sends four ping requests to the Uplink Failover check IP every five seconds Only if all four ping requests are not replied to the Backup Interface is loaded When the Internet connection is established via the Backup Interface the ping requests are still sent by the Primary Inter face As soon as the security system receives the corresponding reply packages to the ping requests again the Internet con nection is again established by
222. lters The Filters function allows you to filter Packet Filter Rules by specific attributes This function enhances the management of huge networks with extensive sets of rules since rules of a specific type can be presented in a concise way Filtering rules 1Click on the Filters button 2The entry window will open 231 Enter the filter attributes in the fields Not all attributes must be defined Group If you want to filter the rules of a specific group select them from the drop down menu State This drop down menu allows you to filter rules by a specific status Source This drop down menu allows you to filter rules by a specific source address Service If you want to filter rules by a specific service select it from the drop down menu Action This drop down menu allows you to filter rules by a specific action Destination Port This drop down menu allows you to filter rules by a specific destination address Log This drop down menu allows you to filter logged rules Comment If you want to filter rules by specific comments enter the expressions in the entry menu 232 To start the filter click on the Apply Filters button Only the filtered packet filter rules will be displayed then When the menu is closed the complete set of rules will be displayed again 206 Using the Security System Quality of Service QoS cd 3 gt 0 5 3 o tad Internet Service Providers usually measure the
223. m In MS Windows environments the authentica tion with NTML is in general configured for clients using the Internet Explorer browser However also systems with clients that use the browsers Firefox or Mozilla e g Mozilla 1 6 can be successfully operated Note In order for the domain joining process to work one of the Domain Controllers DC for this domain must be in the systems broadcast range The authentication with NTLM can at present only be used for the HTTP proxy to perform Single Sign On for Internet Explorer clients The notion of Single Sign On SSO is in general used for a unique central sign on of a user into an IT structure This is very useful since 74 Using the Security System the user must enter his identification data only once and will then be authenticated for all centrally connected services This allows for the implementation of a uniform user and rights structure in a company In the conception of a central and unique authentication that shall be based on existing infrastructures a series of requirements must be met e Central administration user authentication data must be main tained on only single place only e Simple use from the perspective of the user data shall be consistent and not kept twice i e only one password for all services e Security passwords shall not be readable for attackers The advantage of the latter is that the data in the concept presented here are never transferred o
224. mn will at first show that the interface is Down the system requires a short time to configure and load the settings 135 Click the Refresh button to load the menu again Further information about the Refresh function can be found in chapter on page 36 When the message Up appears the interface is fully operational The network card settings are displayed in the Parameters column Using the Security System 4 3 2 2 Additional Address on Ethernet Interface One network card can be configured with multiple additional IP addresses also called IP aliases This func tion allows you to manage multiple logical networks on one physical network card It can also be used to assign further addresses to a security system running NAT NAT is described in further detail in chapter on page 168 Each network card can be configured with up to 255 additional addresses Adding additional addresses to a network card 1In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu 2Click on the New button The Add Interface window will open 136 In the Name entry field enter a descriptive name for the interface 137 Use the Hardware drop down menu to select a network card 138 Use the Type drop down menu to select Additional address on Ethernet interface 139 Now make the specific settings for this interface type Address For this interface type the address must be statically defined This kind of interface can only use static addresses Netmask This
225. mode to support such requests you must either use a different mode or enter an explicit rule in the Packet Filter Rules allowing them Example Source a local network Service service with target address the service must first be defined in the Definitions Services menu Destination IP address of the web server or Any Action Allow HTTPS TCP IP Port 443 data is passed directly through the security system without processing Note In order to use the Proxy in Standard mode the client Browser must be configured with the TCP IP Address of the security system and the proxy port configured in the Proxies HTTP menu In addition the HTTP proxy service requires a valid Name server DNS Without configuring the client browser the Proxy can only be used in Transparent mode 222 Using the Security System Global Settings Operation Modes Standard In this mode you must select all networks which should be allowed to use the HTTP proxy service If a browser on a non configured network is configured to use the proxy it will have no access to HTTP services If a browser on a non proxied network is not configured to use the proxy an appropriate packet filter rule can allow un proxied access to HTTP services Example Source IP address of a local client Service HTTP Destination IP address of the web server or Any Action Allow To use the proxy configure the client browser proxy settings to use the IP address of the
226. mote attacks While forwarding and re ceiving messages the proxy can also scan them for potentially dangerous contents This menu also allows you to configure anti spam parameters to block yan Se the Sem we we vw e unwanted e mails chech BATV Groytoning recipient sender Profiies and domain group assignment This menu allows you to configure the POP3 Proxy for incoming e mails The SMTP Proxy receives all e mails at the gateway and then forwards them to their destination Because there is no direct contact between internal and external machines only data are transferred and no protocol errors will propagate The SMTP proxy monitors the SMTP protocol on TCP port 25 Note In order to use the SMTP Proxy correctly a valid nameserver DNS must be activated System notifications are sent to the administrator even if the SMTP proxy is disabled 251 Using the Security System Configuring the SMTP Proxy 1In the Proxies tab open the SMTP menu 264 Click the Enable button next to Status to start the proxy 265 Inthe Global Settings window configure the basic settings Hostname MX Enter the hostname here If you wish to use TLS encryption this hostname must be identical with the one listed in your DNS server s MX record Otherwise other mail servers using TLS will refuse to send in coming mails Important Note Postmaster Address Enter the e Mail address of the post master here 266 Sav
227. n The entry window will open 109 Make the following settings Name In the entry field enter a unique network group name This name will be used later for example to configure packet filter rules Allowed characters are The only allowed characters are alphanumeric characters minus space and underscore _ Names may be up to 39 characters long Type Select Network Group from the drop down menu 109 Using the Security System Initial Members From the selection field select the network card by pressing the Ctrl key on the keyboard and selecting the name with the mouse Comment You can enter a network group description in this entry field 110 Save the network group by clicking on the Add Definition button After successful definition the new network group will appear in the network table The network group name will also be available for use in various configuration menus Defining IPSec user group This definition contains only the Distinguished Name DN It is used for incoming IPSec connections using X 509 certificates If the DN of the group corresponds to the one of the user his virtual IP address will dynamically be added to the group 1Under the Definitions tab open the Networks menu 2Click on the New Definition button The entry window will open 111 Make the following settings Name In the entry field enter a unique name for the IPsec user group This name will be used later for example
228. n Define the line of the table in which the packet filter rule will be entered It is possible to change the sequence of the packet filter rules later By default the rule is placed at the end To Bottom of the rules table Group For a smooth management of the set of rules the packet filter rules can be grouped together in one group This does not influence the way in which a rule will be processed within the set of rules For the first rule no group can be selected from the drop down menu yet New groups are defined in the set of rules table 201 Using the Security System 202 Source In the drop down menu select the source address of the data packets The Any setting applies to all IP addresses regardless of whether these are publicly assigned IP addresses or private IP addresses according to RFC1918 Service Use the drop down menu to select a service This list includes all the pre defined services included in the Security system as well as the ones that you defined yourself This allows you to define precisely which traffic should be allowed The Any setting represents here all combinations of protocols and source and or destination ports Destination In the drop down menu select the destination ad dress of the data packets The Any setting applies to all IP addresses regardless of whether these are publicly assigned IP addresses or private IP addresses according to RFC1918 Action In the Action drop down menu
229. n Up2Date system The Up2Date Service option is described in chapter on page 48 When you ve completed these steps the initial configuration of your security system is complete Click the Exit tab to leave WebAdmin Problems If you have problems completing these steps please visit the Novell Support Forum at http support novell com forums 2sm html 28 Installation 3 WebAdmin The WebAdmin tool allows you to configure every aspect of the Internet security system This chapter explains the tools and concepts used by WebAdmin and shows how to use the built in online help system WebAdmin has five main components Socie manager BDE 1 Info Box 2 Tabs 3 Menus 4 Online help 5 Refresh Ieee ea oo Be 29 Installation 3 1 Info Box Novelle Security Manager powered by Astaro Definitions gt Networks Network Definitions Pim a Thu Feb 10 2005 19 19 08 Uptime Od Oh 3m System User admin Definitions 10 113 113 4 Network Last Login admin 10 113 113 4 Thu Feb 10 18 51 49 test Broadcast Intrusion Protection Packet Filter Proxies IPSec VPN test Network The system time and time zone are always displayed in the top left hand corner of the screen If you roll the mouse over the time display the Info Box will appear con taining the following infor mation Uptime Displays how long the security system has been running without a restart
230. n different configurations If the Encryption function has been enabled the backup file will be encrypted with either the DES or 3DES algorithms and can only be read or loaded using the correct password Important Note 33 To generate the backup file click the Start button The system will now generate a backup file When the message Backup has been created successfully appears the process has completed successfully 34 To copy the backup file to your local PC click the Save button 35 On the File download menu choose the Save file to disk and click the OK button 36 Choose a descriptive file name on the Save file as menu The security system will automatically produce file names consisting of backup date and time backup_yyyymmdd_hhmmss abf astaro backup file 37 Check the generated backup file for readability by importing it back into WebAdmin and clicking on the Start button 58 Using the Security System The security system will now load and check the backup file If the ckecksums are correct you will now receive the Backup Information 38 Abort the restore process by opening a different menu within the tab After each system change create a new backup file If you load g anew backup file and if for example you have changed the IP address or forgotten the password you might not be able to access the newly configured system Attention 59 Using the Security System Advanced Encrypti
231. nction is disabled Off further networks and hosts can be connected to the IPSec VPN tunnel through the setting of Source NAT rules The Strict Routing function can only be disabled or enabled in the Standard type of connection For all other types of con nections the function is always enabled 287 In the Endpoint Definition window select the endpoint of the IPSec tunnel Local Endpoint Use the drop down menu to select the local endpoint Always choose the network interface on the same side of the firewall as the remote endpoint Remote Endpoint Choose the remote endpoint here With the Road Warrior or MS Windows L2TP IPSec types of con nection the remote endpoint has always a dynamic IP address 288 The Subnet definition optional window allows you to set an optional subnet for both endpoints Local Subnet Choose the local subnet here Remote Subnet Choose the remote subnet here 293 Using the Security System With a road warrior connection only the local subnet can be configured This is no more possible if you additionaly enable the L2TP Encapsulation function in step Note With the MS Windows L2TP IPSec connection this window will mot be displayed The IPSec VPN access will be managed through the Packet Filter 289 Select the associated key in the Authentication of Remote Station s window IPSec remote keys are defined in the IPSec VPN Remote Key menu The settings in this window depend on the type of c
232. nction of this security system supports 1DES 56bit 3DES 168bit AES Rijndael 128bit AES Rijndael 192bit AES Rijndael 256bit Blowfish Serpent 128bit and Twofish Authentication Algorithm The hashing algorithm ensures the integrity of the IKE messages The MD5 128bit SHA1 160bit SHA2 256bit and SHA2 512bit algorithms are supported The algorithm used is determined by the remote endpoint of the IPSec connection The SHA2 256bit and SHA2 512bit algorithms require a great Important Note deal of system resources I IKE DH Group The IKE group Diffie Hellmann group describes the kind of asymmetric encryption used during key exchange The IPSec VPN system on this security system supports the Group 1 MODP768 Group 2 MODP 1024 Group 5 MODP 1536 Group X MODP 2048 Group X 298 Using the Security System MODP 3072 and Group X MODP 4096 protocols The group used is determined by the remote endpoint SA lifetime secs This option allows you to set the lifetime of IKE sessions in seconds This is set by default to 7800 seconds 2h 10 min In general times between 60 and 28800 seconds 1 min to 8 hours are allowed 296 In the IPSec Settings window configure the settings for the IPSec connection IPSec Mode This system only supports tunnel mode IPSec Protocol This system only supports ESP Encryption Algorithm Choose the encryption algorithm to use here The IPSec VPN function of this security system sup
233. nd ports 11 through 20 to VLAN 2 With such a configuration a computer on port 1 would not be able to communicate with a computer on port 11 The technology essentially allows one physical switch to be divided into two logical ones In order to connect the security system to the virtual LANs the system requires a network card with a tag capable driver A tag is a 4 byte header attached to packets as part of the Ethernet header The tag contains the number of the VLAN that the packet should be sent to the VLAN number is a 12 bit number allowing up to 4095 virtual LANs The WebAdmin tool refers to this number as the VLAN Tag The tagged packets are only used to communicate between the VLAN compatible switch and the security system the other computers on the network do not need to have tag compatible network cards The port on the switch connected to the security system must also be configured as an untagged port Most VLAN compatible switches can be configured by using a terminal program over a serial interface Example configuration 145 Using the Security System Floor l The graphic at left J PC6 i rR ae TP vute Shows an office where computers are distrib uted across two floors Each floor has a separ ate switch and each computer is connected to the switch on its floor In this configur ation PC1 and PC2 on the first floor and PC4 on the second floor will be connected together on VLAN 10 PC3 PCS and PC6 will be connec
234. nfirm that the remote host supports this function TLS is used for encryption not just authentication SMTP is generally not en crypted and can easily be read by third persons The function should therefore be enabled Important Note Some mail servers such as Lotus Domino use non standard implementations of TLS While these servers claim to support TLS during connection negotiation they cannot establish a TLS full session If TLS is enabled it will not be possible to send messages to these servers In such situations please contact the administrator of the mail server Use Smarthost If you wish to use an Upstream Smarthost to deliver messages enable this function and enter the IP address of the smarthost here In this case the proxy will not attempt to deliver messages itself but will instead forward them to the smarthost The proxy will however deliver messages locally to domains defined in the Incoming Mail window For the Smarthost the Username and Password can be defined as an option 273 Using the Security System 4 6 7 Proxy Content Manager The Proxy Content Manager menu allows you to manage all of the e mails quarantined by the proxy as well as those which because of an error the system was unable to forward This menu uses the following concepts to display and manage the e mails Global Actions Please select Refresh proxy content table z SMTP POP3 proxy content Total 7 entries Filters 7 al elre ee
235. ng on the correspondent icon with the mouse 194 Using the Security System U This window presents the parameters of this as Low Layer Information Quw Clicking on the icon connects you to the correspondent link in the Internet The Website contains further information on the IPS rule This information is compiled in projects such as Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures CVE and published in the Internet Setting an IPS rule You can add your own IPS rules to the set of rules The rules are based on the syntax of the Snort Open Source ID System Manually configured IPS rules are always locally imported to an IPS set of rules For more information please see the following Internet address http www snort org 1Under the Intrusion Protection tab open the Rules menu 2Click on the button The entry window will open 195 Using the Security System 226 Make the following settings Intrusion Protection Rules Total 2491 entries 2447 filtered 44 shown A New Rule 3 7 Filters 7 Description example Selector icmp EXTERNAL_NET any gt HOME_NET any Filter dsize 800 Add local Rule Hint Local rules will be added to the local group p attack responses 0 Recognition of successful attacks Description Enter a description of the rule in the entry field Example Large ICMP packet Selector Enter the selection parameters for the IPS rule in the Snort syntax in the entry field Example icmp EXTERNAL_N
236. ni konstanz of the de domain As with IP addresses the individual parts of the name are separated from each other by a point Whereas in contrast to IP addresses IP names are not limited to four numbers Moreover several IP names can be assigned to one IP address which are referred to as aliases Masquerading Dynamic Masquerading is a technology based on NAT that allows an entire LAN to use one public IP address to communicate with the rest of the Internet Example The administrator has established an internal LAN and has given each computer on it IP addresses from the private IP range One computer for example has the address 192 168 2 15 Only one official IP address e g 199 199 199 1 is assigned to all computers in its network i e if only one HTTP request starts to the Internet its IP address will be replaced by the IP address of the external network card The data traffic for the external network Internet thus does not contain internal information The answer to the request will be recognized by the firewall and forwarded to the requesting computer 363 Glossary nslookup Nslookup is originally a UNIX program designed to query name servers The main application is the display of IP names in the case of a given IP number and vice versa Moreover also additional functions such as aliases can be displayed Port While at the IP level only sender and destination addresses are important the TCP and UDP protocols
237. nk usage exceeds PPP over Serial Modem Line PPPoE DSL connection PPPoE DSL connections proxy ARP QoS status 130 148 152 158 setting up PPP over serial modem standard Ethernet interface uplink bandwidth kbits 130 148 153 159 uplink failover on interface Uplink Failover on Interface virtual LAN wireless LAN wireless LAN access point wireless LAN security Intrusion Protection advanced global settings introduction IPS rules overview notification levels portscan detection rules setting rule IPSec VPN 370 advanced AH protocol CA management connections global IPSec settings introduction IPSec 124 164 127 125 122 130 164 131 131 131 131 160 150 155 128 163 160 127 163 128 162 145 135 139 136 197 190 190 193 192 190 192 195 314 286 309 288 289 280 284 IPSec connections IPSec modes IPSec protocols IPSec system information key management L2TP over IPSec local IPSec X 509 key local keys manual key distribution Policies PSK authentication remote keys RSA authentication transport mode tunnel mode VPN Routes VPN status L2TP over IPSec L2TP over IPSec client parameters L2TP over IPSec IP pool L2TP over IPSec settings Licensed Users Licensing Load Balancing deleting rules editing rules introduction Local Logs browse configuring local log file level configuring remote log file archive delete log files after span of time filt
238. nline banking is not accessible the Packet Filter Live Log can help you reconstruct which packets are being blocked by the packet filter So By clicking on the Show button a new window will appear This window dis plays rules violations in the order of their occur rence in real time and in table form The back ground color allows you to see which action has been performed for the respect ive violation of a rule e Red The package was dropped Packages that have been blocked due to the Spoof Protection Validate Packet Length and SYN Rate Limiter functions also have a red background color e Yellow The package was rejected e Green The package was allowed through 218 Using the Security System Setting Resetting the Live Log Filter With the help of the IP Address Netmask and Port entry fields and of the Protocol drop down menu you can configure the Packet Filter Live Log such that only violations of rules with specific attributes are displayed in the table The filter influences violations of rules that are logged after enabling this function The filter is enabled by clicking on the Set button To reset the filter click the Clear button From this moment on all violations of rules will be displayed in the Packet Filter Live Log again Clicking on the Pause Log check box interrupts or continues the update Note Please note that only those processed rules will be filed in a protocol for which the
239. no legitimate e mails will be lost e Quarantine The e mail will be accepted but kept in quarantine The e mail will be displayed in the Proxy Content Manger menu with the status Quarantine This menu presents further options including options to read or send a mail securely e Pass The e mail will be treated by the filter but allowed to pass A Header will be added to the e mail by which it can be sorted or filtered on the mail server or in the e Mail programs of the recipient A description of how the rules are created in Microsoft Outlook 2000 can be found on page 268 261 Using the Security System Trigger on In this drop down menu you define which errors cause that the e mail is treated according to the Action function e Level 1 This step causes that only e mails with most serious errors are treated This setting is recommended since many users use a deficient encryption program that already responds in the higher levels Level 2 und 3 e Level 2 With the exception of the e mails with the ordinary errors all are treated e Level 3 Any e mails with errors are treated File Extension Filter This module allows the firewall to selectively filter attachments based on their file extensions The extensions to filter can be selected in the Extensions list tool Action This drop down menu allows you to select the action the proxy should take upon finding a message with a filtered string The following actions are p
240. notification e mail Intrusion Protection Event Event buffering activated A packet was identified that may be part of an intrusion The matching rule classified this as highest priority level Event buffering has been activated Further Intrusion Protection events will be collected and sent to you when the collection period has expired If more events occur this period will be increased Further information on the Intrusion Prevention event can be found in the notification e mail Intrusion Protection Event Buffered Events After the activation of the event buffering further IPS events have been collected Please see the attached file for a list of collected events This list will show you a maximum of events A complete event history has been stored in the Intrusion Protection log files 357 Using the Security System 4 11 Online Help The Help menu contains further functions for use with the Online Help system Search This function allows you to search WebAdmin s Online Help system for a particular term Results will appear in a separate window Starting a search 1Under the Online Help tab open the Search menu 2Enter your search term in the Search term field 3Begin the search by clicking Start If the term is found in either WebAdmin or the Online Help system the following results will be returned e path to the relevant function in WebAdmin e link to the relevant Online Help p
241. ntire network Destination address Choose the original destination address here This can be either a single host or an entire network Using the Security System Service Choose the original service here the service is defined by source and destination ports as well as protocol used e g TCP Note service can only be redirected when the communicating addresses are also redirected In addition a service can only be redirected to another service when the two services use the same protocol 196 Use the next drop down menus to define how the packets should be translated At least one parameter in this window must be defined in order to create a valid DNAT SNAT rule If you redirect the original ad dress to an entire network the addresses in that network will be used one after another Change Source to SNAT Choose a new source address for the translated packets This can be either a single host or an entire network Service source This drop down menu will only be shown when you have chosen an address in the Change source to menu Only services with one source port can be used here Change Destination to DNAT Choose a new destination address here This can be either a single host or an entire network Service destination This drop down menu will only be shown when you have chosen an address in the Change destination to menu 197 Save the settings by clicking Add After successfully defining a rule it will appear
242. ntral server program on the network The server is usually responsible for keeping track of the data while the client is responsible for presenting the data to the user In order to function correctly the client and server must both use a well defined network protocol to communicate All important applications on the Internet e g WWW FTP news use this model DNS The Domain Name Systems also The Domain Name Service translates the underlying IP addresses of Internet connected com puters into more human friendly names or aliases and vice versa This translation from number to name is done by the name server Every Internet connected institution must employ at least two separate DNS servers to answer queries about its internal DNS names and IP numbers Every top level domain also has name servers which contain information about their subordinate servers 360 Glossary The DNS system is thus a distributed hierarchical database DNS resolution is normally handled by network applications rather than by the user him or herself Dual Homed Gateway A dual homed gateway is a computer that is directly connected to two networks i e it has two network cards each connected to a different network and which forwards information from one network to the other Due to the fact that there is no IP forwarding all connections must be forwarded through this Dual Homed Gateway Firewall A firewall protects one network or subnet e g an
243. ntries by clicking Add Definition 209 Using the Security System Segment wide Broadcast For each network card configured in the Interfaces menu the system automatically defines a network named NAME Broadcast For more information please see the Current Interface Status section of chapter on page 122 1Under Packet Filter open the Rules menu and enter the following rule Source Any Service Any Destination Select the broadcast network for the relevant interface here Example NAME Broadcast Action Drop Comment optional Enter a comment 236 Confirm the entries by clicking Add Definition 210 Using the Security System 4 5 2 ICMP ICMP Settings This menu is used to config ure the settings for Inter net Control Message Pro tocol ICMP packets ICMP is used for testing network connectivity and troubleshooting network problems Note More information on ICMP can also be found in the Ping and Traceroute sections ICMP on firewall and ICMP forwarding apply to all IP addresses Any When ICMP on firewall is activated green status light all IP addresses can ping the firewall when ICMP forwarding is enabled computers on the external network can ping hosts behind the firewall Pings to single IP addresses cannot then be blocked with packet filter rules Settings configured here take precedence over rules configured in the Important Note I packet filter rules table When the ICMP s
244. o Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP option Sharing This menu allows you to share the PPTP connection with other computers on the local network To start the PPTP connection simply click the new icon in the Start Settings Network and Dialup Connections menu Further information is usually available from the network administrator 185 Using the Security System 4 3 7 Accounting When the Accounting func tion is enabled the security system will track all trans mitted data and compile statistics about it The ac counting menu allows you to select which network cards should be monitored You can download the data from the Log Files Accounting menu or view daily reports in the Reporting Accounting menu Important Note In the normal case you should only enable Accounting on one network card because if more than one card is monitored data forwarded from one monitored interface to another monitored one will be counted twice If you use Masquerading you should probably use Accounting on the internal interface Otherwise data packets dropped by the security system filters will be included and will appear to come from the wrong interface It is also possible to exclude certain Hosts or Networks from the accounting records After installation all networks are included in accounting records It may be useful to block certain hosts or networks from accounting data for instance when a DMZ host only communicates with
245. o join computers to a domain Usually it is the Administrator This name is only used for joining the domain and is not saved on the security system Password Enter the password for the above account This password is only used for joining the domain and is not saved on the security system 71 Confirm your settings by clicking Save Once the security system is successfully joined to the Domain the confirmation will be displayed under Domain Member Status 4 1 7 4 LDAP Server LDAP the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol defines the way in which clients communicate with X 500 conforming directory 76 Using the Security System services The protocol thus specifies the type of access to such a directory service The security system uses the LDAP protocol to authenticate users for several of its services The security system allows or denies access on the basis of certain attributes or group memberships established on the LDAP server This system supports the Microsoft Active Directory and Novell eDirectory LDAP servers as well as those based on the Open Source OpenLDAP software Microsoft Active Directory is an indexing service designed espe cially for Windows NT 2000 networks and allows the central manage ment and organization of network resources It allows users to access system resources after a single sign on to a central server and offers administrators centrally organized management of users regardless of network topo
246. occured while running installer The system updat failed Pleas contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Installer ended due to internal error The system updat failed Pleas contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Started without rpm parameters The system updat failed Pleas contact the support department of your firewall provider Pattern Up2Date failed Could not select Authentication Server s If the problem continues please contact the support department of your firewall provider Pattern Up2Date failed Could not connect to Authentication Server s The authentication server is not reachable If the problem continues please contact the sup port department of your firewall provider Virus Pattern Up2Date failed Could not connect to Up2Date Server The Up2Date server is not reachable If the problem continues please contact the support department of your firewall provider Intrusion Protection Pattern Up2Date failed Could not connect to Up2Date Server 355 Using the Security System 395 356 357 358 360 361 362 712 356 The Up2Date server is not reachable If the problem continues please contact the support department of your firewall provider Virus Pattern Up2Date failed No active bases for Virus Patterns found Intrusion Protection Pattern Up2Date failed No active base
247. olumn Display Setting p Adding editing groups Clicking in the field in the Group column opens an entry window Clicking on the Save button saves your changes In order to interrupt this process click on the Cancel button Enabling Disabling Packet filter rules The status light in the fourth column shows the rule status Clicking the status light toggles the state between active green light and inactive red light Deactivated rules remain in the database but have no effect on firewall behavior Edit rules Clicking on the correspondent setting will open an entry window The rule can then be modified Click Save to save your changes In order to interrupt this process click on the Cancel button Re order rules The order of the rules in the table determines the behavior of the firewall having the correct order is essential for secure operation By clicking the position number you can adjust the order to suit your needs In the drop down menu select the Position to which you wish to place the packet filter rule and confirm your settings by clicking on the Save button Delete rules Click the trash can icon to delete a rule from the table Sorting the rules table By clicking on the column headers you can sort the table for instance to sort the rules by sender address click Source To return to the precedence based sorting Matching click the column with the position numbers 205 Using the Security System Fi
248. omment You can enter a network description in this entry field 106 Save the network by clicking on the Add Definition button WebAdmin will check that your entries are valid After successful definition the new network will appear in the network table The network name will also be available for use in various configuration menus Using the network name you can for instance enable HTTP proxy access for the new network under Proxies HTTP 108 Using the Security System Adding DNS Server 1Under the Definitions tab open the Networks menu 2Click on the New Definition button The entry window will open 107 Make the following settings Name In the entry field enter a unique DNS Server name This name will be used later for example to configure packet filter rules Allowed characters are The only allowed characters are alphanumeric characters minus space and underscore _ Names may be up to 39 characters long Type Select DNS Hostname from the drop down menu Hostname Enter the hostname in this entry field Comment You can enter a DNS Server description in this entry field 108 Save the host by clicking on the Add Definition button If the definition is successful the new Host will be entered in the network table You will now find this host under its name also in different other menus Defining Network Group 1Under the Definitions tab open the Networks menu 2Click on the New Definition butto
249. on The backup file contains all configuration settings as well as the respective certificates and keys The Encryption function allows you to encrypt the file using DES or 3DES Encryption of e mail Backup Files 1 Open the Backup menu in the System tab 2 Scroll to the Advanced window 39 Enable the Encryption function by clicking on the Enable button The Encryption function is enabled when the status light shows green 40 In the Passphrase entry field enter the password Security Note With passwords with up to seven characters the Backup file will be encrypted with DES and from eight characters on with 3DES 41 To confirm enter the password again into the Confirmation entry field 42 Click the Save button to save these settings All Backup files that have been created manually or automatically by the system will now be encrypted with the defined password Important Note A backup file that has been encrypted with Encryption can only be loaded to the system with the password that was used for the creation of the Backup Send Backups by E Mail The Security system can also send you automatically created backup files by e mail so that you don t have 60 Using the Security System to remember to save the settings of your Internet security system manually on a data carrier Then the file is e mailed to the entered e mail address These e mailed files are about 100 kilobytes long Generating an E Mail Bac
250. on Manager If the Internet security system is con figured remotely via the Configuration Manager the correspondent processes will be logged to these log files User Authentication daemon The activities of the UA Daemon are logged to these log files UA is used as the central authentication daemon for various services Boot messages The boot messages are recorded to these log files Configuration daemon The activities of the AUA Daemon are logged to these log files The log files belong to the support logs and will only be displayed after clicking on the show support logs button Content Filter The activities of the content filters on the HTTP SMTP and POP3 Proxies are logged to these log files DHCP client If the interfaces are automatically assigned to IP addresses on the Internet security system the activities are recorded to these log files DHCP server If the Internet security system is used as DHCP server and assigns dynamic IP addresses to the clients in the network the activities are recorded to these log files Fallback archive These log files are used as a security archive for logged processes which cannot be assigned to one of the log files The log files belong to the support logs and will only be displayed 340 Using the Security System after clicking on the show support logs button In general those log files are empty High Availability The activities of the High Availability HA system are logged to these log fi
251. on mode The configuration of the HTTP proxy is described in more detail in chapter on page 221 Configure the Packet Filter In the Rules menu under the Packet Filter tab you can establish packet filtering rules By default all packets are filtered until you explicitly enable certain services New rules are added to the bottom of the list and are inactive until explicitly enabled The rules are processed starting with the first and moving down the list stopping at the first applicable rule To activate a rule click the status light once the status light will turn green 27 Installation 24 25 Please note that because the security system uses Stateful Inspection only the connection building packets need be specified All response packets will automatically be recognized and accepted Configuring the Packet Filter is described in chapter on page 199 Debug Packet Filter Rules With the Packet Filter Live Log function In the Packet Filter Advanced menu you can see which packets the packet filter is filtering If you have problems after installing your security system this information can be helpful in debugging your filtering rules The Packet Filter Live Log function is described in chapter on page 214 Install System and Virus Scanner Updates You should download and install the latest System Up2Dates as soon as possible If you have a license for the Virus Protection option you should also run the Patter
252. on the Up2Date package s can be found in the notification e mail System Up2Date Started System Up2Date Instal lation Pattern Up2Date Started Pattern Up2Date Further information on the Up2Date Service can be found in chapters on page 48 Pattern Up2Date No new pattern available for Virus Protection Pattern Up2Date No new pattern available for Intrusion Protection Pattern Up2Date Trying another pattern typ Pattern Up2Date succeeded Updated new Intrusion Protection patterns For more information please see the notification e mail Further information on th System Up2 Date can be found in chapters on page 48 Virus Pattern Up2Date No pattern installation for Virus pattern needed Virus Pattern Up2Date succeeded Installed new Virus Pattern For more information please see the notification e mail Daily log file archive This is an archive file containing the log files The date of these log files is specified in the notification 710 850 851 855 Using the Security System Log file partition is filling up The log file partition usag reached th specified value in percent Depending on your configuration the system will automatically take measures if the usage continues to grow To make sure you don t lose any important log files please check the WebAdmin settings and or remove old log files manually Intrusion Protection Event A packet was identified that may be par
253. on the option field or execute changes In order to close the Rules Wizard click on the button OK Using the Security System SMTP Authentication The Require TLS Connec tion function allows you to specify if appropriate en crypted connections should be required TLS for incoming connections is always turned on and the proxy will use strong encryption automatically if the remote host supports this function SMTP is generally not encrypted and can easily be read by third persons The function should therefore be enabled Some mail servers such as Lotus Domino use non standard I implementations of TLS While these servers claim to support TLS during connection negotiation they cannot establish a TLS full session If TLS is enabled it will not be possible to send messages to these servers In such situations please contact the administrator of the mail server Important Note When configuring clients please note that SPA Secure Password Authentication should not be used SPA is an alternative encryption method which is not supported by this security system You should use an unencrypted authentication method instead and use TLS or SSL to encrypt the session The Authentication methods selection menu allows you to select the user authentication method to be used Only those authentication methods you have configured in the Settings User Authentication menu are available here Local users are defined in the Definitions U
254. onnection 7 1 Standard Key Use the drop down menu to select a Remote Key 7 2 Road Warrior L2TP Encapsulation This drop down menu allows you to additionally enable L2TP over IPSec On Keys Select the Remote Keys for the road warrior connection from the selection window 7 3 Road Warrior CA L2TP Encapsulation This drop down menu allows you to ad ditionally enable L2TP over IPSec On Use CA With the road warrior CA connection type the authenti cation is based on the Distinguished Name DN of the remote receiver Remote Endpoint You thus need a Certificate Au thority CA from this endpoint Only the VPN Identifier X 509 DN can be used 294 Using the Security System From the drop down menu select X 509 DN Certificate Authority CA Client DN Mask In order to use a Distinguished Name as an ID you will need the following information from the X 509 index Country C State ST Local L Organization O Unit OU Common Name CN and E Mail Address E The data in this entry field must be in the same order as in the certificate 7 3 MS Windows L2TP IPSec L2TP Encapsulation With this type of connection L2TP over IPSec is automatically enabled On IPSec Shared Secret With the MS Windows L2TP IPSec con nection type the authentification is based on Preshared Keys Enter the password into this entry field 290 Save these settings by clicking Add The newly configured IPSec profile will appe
255. ons and allows only those packets associated with a current connection to pass This is especially important for allowing connections from a protected network to an unprotected one but disallowing connections in the opposite direction When a computer in the protected network establishes a connection with an external server the stateful packet filter will allow the server s response packets in to the protected network When the original connection is closed however the packet filter will block all further packets from the unprotected network unless of course they have been explicitly allowed Application Layer Gateways Application Proxies Installation The second main kind of firewall is the application layer gateway These gateways act as a middleman in connections between external systems and protected ones With such gateways packets aren t for warded so much as translated and rewritten with the gateway performing the translation The translation process on the gateway is called a proxy server or proxy for short Because each proxy serves only one or a few well defined application protocols it is able to analyze and log protocol usage at a fine grained level and thereby offer a wide range of monitoring and security options The analysis can be especially intensive at the application level because the application data transferred conforms to standardized protocols The firewall knows about and can inspect every aspect of
256. or entry fields for the selected archiving type will be displayed 320 Configure the settings for the archiving type 3 1 FTP Server Host Use the drop down menu to select a host Port Use the drop down menu to select a port By default FTP is already selected Username Enter a username in the entry field Password Enter the password in this entry field Remote Path Enter the path in the entry field 333 Using the Security System 321 334 3 2 SMB CIFS Share Host Use the drop down menu to select a host Username Enter a username in the entry field Password Enter the password in this entry field Share Name Enter the share name in the entry field 3 3 Secure Copy SSH Server Public DSA Key The Public DSA Key is displayed in this window Host Use the drop down menu to select a host Username Enter a username in the entry field Remote Path Enter the absolute path in the entry field 3 4 Send by E Mail E Mail Address Enter the e mail address into this entry field Save your changes by clicking Save Using the Security System 4 10 2 Local Log File Query The Local Log File Query action allows you to search for specific Log Files in a local archive The search result will be displayed in a separate window Starting searches 1In the Time Span drop down menu select the time span 2In the selection field Logs choose the protocols Please see chapter on page 31 for a description of
257. orks and network groups are described in chapters and 106 respectively Once these definitions have been saved the load balancing rules can be defined Defining Load Balancing rules 1In the Network tab open the NAT Masquerading menu 2Enter a descriptive name for the load balancing rule in the Name entry field A window named Properties will open 202 Enter a descriptive name for the load balancing rule in the Name entry field 203 Use the Rule Type drop down menu to select Load Balancing 174 Using the Security System 204 In the Pre Balancing Target window select the original destination address and service Address or Hostname Select the original destination address here This should usually be the external address of the security system Service Select the destination port service to be balanced 205 In the Post Balancing Target Group drop down menu select the new address This will usually be a network group composed of single hosts When the load balancing rule has been defined and saved it will appear in the NAT Rules table The further functions in the NAT table can now be used for further customization Editing Load Balancing rules Click edit to load the rule into the Edit NAT Rule window The rule can now be changed as desired Deleting Load Balancing rules Click delete to remove a rule from the list 175 Using the Security System 4 3 5 DHCP Server The Dynamic Host Con figuration Pro
258. ort If you want to filter services by a specific target port enter it in this entry field Comment If you want to filter services by specific comments enter the expressions in this entry field 121 To start the filter click on the Apply Filters button Only the filtered services will be displayed in the table Next time when you open the menu the complete service table will be displayed 116 Using the Security System Further Functions Editing Definitions Click on the settings in the Name Value and Comment columns in order to open an editing window You can then edit the entries Deleting Definitions Clicking on the symbol of the trash will delete the definition from the table 4 2 3 Users In the Users menu Local Users are added if the use of proxy services should be limited to sepcial persons This is an alternative to using an external user database This menu allows you to define which user has access to which proxy services Available options are HTTP Proxy SMTP Proxy SOCKS Proxy WebAdmin L2TP over IPSec and PPTP Remote Access Security Note Normally only the admin user has access to WebAdmin The password to WebAdmin should be changed at regular intervals 117 Using the Security System Add Local Users 1Under the Definitions tab open the Users menu 2Click on the New Definition button 122 123 124 118 The entry window will open Make the following settings Username In
259. ossible e Reject The message will be bounced back to the sender with a 5xx error message The bounce message sent to the sender will also contain an explanation of why the message was blocked e Blackhole The e mail will be accepted and silently dropped Do not use this action unless you are absolutely certain no legitimate e mails will be lost e Quarantine The e mail will be accepted but kept in quarantine The e mail will be displayed in the Proxy Content Manger menu with the status Quarantine This menu presents further options including options to read or send a mail securely e Pass The e mail will be treated by the filter but allowed to pass A Header will be added to the e mail by which it can be sorted or filtered on the mail server or in the e Mail programs of the recipient 262 Using the Security System A description of how the rules are created in Microsoft Outlook 2000 can be found on page 268 Extensions Enter the file extensions such as exe that the firewall should filter The function of the Control List is identical to the Ordered List and described in chapter on page 34 Virus Protection The Virus Protection function allows you to check e mails and attachments for dangerous contents such as viruses Trojan horses and so on The results of the scan are inserted into a header of the message If the Virus Protection discovers an infected e Mail the message will be filtered by the firewall The furthe
260. oth security systems 1 Depending on the selected key length and the processor of the security solution the generation of RSA keys can take several minutes 300 When you click Save the system will begin generating a new RSA key pair Then the active Public Key will be displayed in the Local Public RSA Key window The Public Key from this window will be exchanged with the respective end point e g via e mail The Public Key from the endpoint will be entered later into the Remote Keys menu in the Public Key window The Remote Keys menu is described in chapter on page 304 302 Using the Security System PSK Authentication For authentication through Preshared Keys PSK in this menu no additional configuration for the local IPSec key is required During the key exchange using IKE Main Mode only IPv4 Ad dresses are supported as IPSec identifiers The IPSec identifier in the IKE Main Mode is automatically encrypted with the PSK and so PSK cannot be used for authentication The IP addresses of IKE con nections are automatically used as IPSec identifiers You generate the PSK Key in the IPSec VPN Remote Keys menu It will automatically be used as the Local PSK Key as well 303 Using the Security System 4 7 4 Remote Keys IPSec remote key objects can be administered in the Remote Keys menu An IPSec Remote Key m EES Object represents an IPSec receiver This receiver can either be a Security gateway a Host or also a Road
261. ours The notifi cation includes a list of e mails providing information on arrival time size sender moo subject and message ID for Postmaster sorted in inverse chronological order beginning with the newest Enable the function by clicking the Enable button in the Status line status light shows green Domains Select the domains for which the daily digest of quarantined messages should be called All here available domains must have previously been defined on the Proxies SMTP menu Skip Addresses If you want to exclude certain members of your domain from receiving the daily digest enter their full e mail addresses into the control list The function of the Control List is identical to the Ordered List and described in chapter on page 34 279 Using the Security System 4 7 Virtual Private Networks IPSec VPN A Virtual Private Network VPN is a secure connection between two networks over an untrusted network such as the Internet VPNs are very useful when sensitive information must be transmitted or received over the Internet The VPN prevents third parties from reading or modifying the information in transit The connection is con trolled and secured by the software installed at the connection end points This software implements authentication key exchange and data encryption according to the open Internet Protocol Security IPSec standard Only authenticated computers can communicate through
262. out proxies to the Internet you can now establish the relevant rules in the Network NAT Masquerading menu More information about DNAT SNAT and Masquerading can be found in chapter on page 168 IP routing entries for networks directly connected to the security system s network cards Interface Routes will be added auto matically If required you can also define routing entries manually using the Routing menu This will however usually only be necessary in complex network environments 20 21 22 23 Installation Configure the DNS Proxy In order to speed up name resolution you can specify a local DNS name server or one provided by your ISP in the Proxies DNS menu Otherwise the security system will auto matically use the root name servers If you wish to use the proxy you should configure the DNS Proxy settings now More information about configuring the DNS Proxy can be found in chapter on page 241 Connect other Networks If you wish to connect other internal networks to the security system attach their cables now Configure the HTTP Proxy If computers on the internal network should use the HTTP proxy to connect to the Internet open the HTTP menu in the Proxies tab and click Enable It might be necessary to configure the browsers to allow the computers in the internal network to access the Internet by using the HTTP proxy afterwards e g if the proxy was config ured for the standard operati
263. ports 1DES 56bit 3DES 168bit AES Rijndael 128bit AES Rijndael 192bit AES Rijndael 256bit Blowfish Serpent 128bit and Twofish If you wish to create IPSec connections without encryption choose null here Enforce Algorithm If an IPSec gateway makes a proposition with respect to an encryption algorithm and to the strength it might happen that the gateway of the receiver accepts this proposition even though the IPSec Policy does not correspond to it In order to avoid this Enforce Algorithm must be enabled Example The IPSec Policy requires AES 256 as encryption Whereas a road warrior with SSH Sentinel wants to connect with AES 128 Without Enforce Algorithm the connection will be admitted which constitutes a security risk Authentication Algorithm The MD5 128bit SHA1 160bit SHA2 256bit and SHA2 512bit algorithms are supported The algorithm used is determined by the remote endpoint of the IPSec connection 299 Using the Security System The SHA2 256bit and SHA2 512bit algorithms require a great Important Note deal of system resources I SA Lifetime secs This option allows you to set the lifetime of the IPSec connection This is set by default to 3600 seconds 1h In general times between 60 and 28800 seconds 1 min to 8 hours are allowed PFS The IPSec key used for VPN connections is generated from random numbers When Perfect Forwarding Secrecy PFS is enabled the system will ensure that the numbers use
264. ps IP Address 38 In our example from step 6 of the installation instructions in chapter this would be https 192 168 2 100 If you have not yet generated a Certificate for your WebAdmin site a Security notice will appear More information on how to install a certificate is available in chapter on page 95 Click the Yes button on the security notice to continue Log in to WebAdmin te WebAdran i User admin ise Password the password of the WebAdmin user Both entries are case sensitive Click Login Another administrator is already logged in If another pr administrator is el already logged in to WebAdmin a notice will appear on screen The IP ad dress shows you which computer the other administrator is using 10 The kick function allows you to end the other administrator s session In the Reason field type a reason for ending the other user s session and click Login Using the Security System You are now logged in and can use the WebAdmin to manage the system 4 1 Basic Settings System The menus under the System tab allow you to configure and manage the basic settings of your security system 4 1 1 Settings Administrator Contact E Mail Addresses Whenever certain important events occur such as portscans failed logon attempts or reboots as well as whenever the self monitor or Up2 Date systems generate alerts or reboots the security system will send a notification e mai
265. r handling will be according to the setting configured in the Action drop down menu Action This drop down menu allows you to select the action the proxy should take upon finding a message with a filtered string The following actions are possible e Reject The message will be bounced back to the sender with a 5xx error message The bounce message sent to the sender will also contain an explanation of why the message was blocked e Blackhole The e mail will be accepted and silently dropped Quarantine The e mail will be accepted but kept in quarantine The e mail will be displayed in the Proxy Content Manger menu with the status Quarantine This menu presents further options including options to safely read the message e Pass The e mail will be treated by the filter but allowed to pass A Header will be added to the e mail by which it can be sorted or filtered on the mail server or in the e Mail programs of the recipient 263 Using the Security System A description of how the rules are created in Microsoft Outlook 2000 can be found on page 268 Expression Filter There is the chance that new viruses will appear which are not yet recognized by the firewall Various viruses can be identified because of known strings such as the IloveYou virus The strings are entered into the control list If an e mail contains this string it will be blocked Next to simple strings also expressions can be defined in the form of Per
266. ration Manager you also have to con figure the Configuration Manager user wwwrun password Connecting the Hardware In order to connect the hardware components system 1 and 2 Switches etc as shown in the graphic you have to know which Sys ID has been assigned to which network card on the respective security system The interfaces must be identically configured on both security systems Network cards with the same Sys ID must be connected to the same network The interface to the Sys ID eth2 is used here for example as data transfer connection Using the Security System In order to determine the Sys ID assignment open the Net work Interfaces in the WebAdmin configuration tool All network cards installed to the security system are listed in the Hardware Device Overview table If the network cards are from diverse producers and or of another type you can read the Sys ID assignment here and identify the hardware correspondingly If these are the same network cards proceed as follows The internal network card ethO was already configured during the installation of the software In order to assign the Sys ID to the other network cards set up all network cards as Standard Ethernet network cards with the exception of the Interface for the data transfer connection e g Sys ID eth2 Important Note The network card for the data transfer connection mustn t be configured in the Network Interfaces menu This interface is set
267. re Only alphanumeric and underscore characters are allowed 306 Enter a password with at least four characters in the Pass phrase field 307 Use the Key Size drop down menu to select the desired key length 308 Use the drop down menus and entry fields from Country to E Mail Address to enter identifying on the CA 309 To save the entries click the on the Start button The Signing CA will be loaded into the Certificate Authorities menu This CA will answer CSR requests by generating new host certificates Step 2 Generate a Certificate Request 1In the Host CSR or Certificate table click the New button The Host CSR or Certificate window will open 310 Select the Generate CSR option In the VPN ID drop down menu select the type of VPN ID to use If you select E Mail Address Hostname or IPv4 Ad dress you must enter the relevant information in the field at right The field should be empty if you select the X509 DN option 311 Using the Security System 311 Inthe Name field enter a descriptive name for this certificate request Allowed characters are Only alphanumeric and underscore characters are allowed 312 Enter a password with at least four characters in the Passphrase field 313 Use the Key Size drop down menu to select the desired key length 314 Use the drop down menus and entry fields from Country to E Mail Address to enter identifying information about the certificate holder Common Name If th
268. re information on Licensing see chapter on page 44 15 Configure Basic Settings In the System tab open the Settings menu and enter the fol lowing setting Administrator E Mail Addresses Enter the e mail address of the administrator here You can find further information about these functions in chapter on page 39 In the Network tab open the Hostname DynDNS menu and enter the following settings in the General System Settings window Hostname Enter the Hostname for this security system A domain name may contain alphanumeric characters periods and hyphens The end of the name must be a valid top level domain such as com de or org The Hostname will be included in all Notification E Mails Save the settings by clicking Save 24 Installation 16 Configure the internal Network Interface ethO In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu and check the settings for ethO network card The settings for this network card are based on the information entered during the software installation After starting the security system they are shown in the Current Interface Status window If you wish to change settings for this card for example changing the configured name please open the Edit Interface window by clicking the edit button and make these changes now typesath _mare00 50 fe 39 60 73 Attention If you change the IP address of the ethO network card you m will be locked out of W
269. rge per Important Note centage of system resources I Pass Quarantine when Score exceeds These drop down menus can be used to select the strategy to use in marking messages as spam The difference between the maximum values is defined through the probability that legitimates messages such as HTML Newsletters will be blocked It is possible to set a value between 1 and 15 in the drop down menu With level 1 the e mails are already treated with a low spam score The following Levels serve as clue e Aggressive 03 This strategy will catch most spam messages It may also identify some legitimate messages for example HTML newsletters as spam 247 Using the Security System e Reasonable 05 This strategy is a compromise between Aggressive and Reasonable e Conservative 08 This strategy will only catch messages that are highly likely to be spam Legitimate messages are unlikely to be caught The following actions are preset e Quarantine The e mail will be accepted but kept in quarantine The Proxy Content Manager menu will list this e mail with status Quarantine This menu presents further options including options to read or to send the message e Pass The proxy will add a Header to the message noting that it has found a potentially dangerous string but will then allow the message to pass A Header will be added to the e mail by which it can be sorted or filtered on the mail server or in the e mail program of the r
270. rious threat to network security If you select No from the drop down menu the WEP specific configuration options will be ignored by the system Using the Security System WEP Authentication If you wish to enable WEP authentication select Yes from the drop down menu All nodes on the wireless network must be configured with the correct WEP Key Require WEP If you do not wish to allow nodes not supporting WEP onto the wireless network choose Yes here WEP Key Enter the WEP key to use in the WEP Key 0 through 3 entry fields In order to use WEP encryption you will need at least one WEP key up to four can be used For a 40 bit key enter a string with 5 hexadecimal digits separ ated by colons In order to use a 104 bit key enter a string of 13 hexadecimal digits separated by colons The string must consist of hexadecimal digits Please note that a hexadecimal number is two characters each either a number 0 9 or a letter A F Example of a 40 bit key 17 A5 6B 45 23 Default WEP Key Use the drop down menu to choose one of the defined WEP Keys 0 3 which should be used as the default key This key will be used as the current key which all the other nodes must use to access the wireless network Access Mode Choose the filter mode for the wireless LAN If all nodes should be allowed access subject of course to WEP restrictions select All stations can get access If you wish to configure a positive filter select Stations in
271. rivate IP addresses for the PPTP pool and you wish PPTP connected computers to be allowed to access the Internet appropriate Masquerading or NAT rules must be in place PPTP Client Parameters This window allows you to define name servers DNS and WINS and the name service domain which should be assigned to hosts during the connection es tablishment Connections with MS Windows 2000 The following example shows how to configure a PPTP VPN connection on a Windows 2000 host 1Under the Network tab open the PPTP VPN Access menu 2In the PPTP VPN Access window enable the system by clicking Enable The status light will show green and the menu will open 212 In the PPTP VPN Access window make the settings for the network access Logging Keep the setting Normal Encryption In the drop down menu select the encryption type The available options are weak 40 bit and strong 128 bit 182 Using the Security System Note that in contrast to Windows 98 and Windows ME Windows 2000 does not come with 128 bit encryption installed to use this kind of connection the High Encryption Pack or Service Pack 2 must be installed SP2 cannot be uninstalled later The selected encryption strength will take effect immediately Both sides of the connection must use the same encryption i strength If WebAdmin is set to use 40 bit encryption and the MS Windows 2000 client is set to use 128 bit encryption Windows will incorrectly r
272. roxy The activities of the SOCKS proxy are recorded to these log files SSH remote login Information on the log in processes to the remote shell is recorded to these log files System log messages These Log Files record generic information about the daemon processes running on the system Among other things the access to the SNMP service and the activities of the Dynamic DNS function are recorded to these log files Up2Date Service messages The activities of the Up2Date Service are recorded to these log files This comprises also the System Up2Date and Pattern Up2Date processes Uplink Failover messages The activities of the configured failovers are recorded to these log files WebAdmin usage The use of the WebAdmin configuration tool is recorded to these log files The logs contain the configuration 343 Using the Security System changes implemented by the configuration tool and also the log in and log out processes 4 10 3 2 Error Codes The following is a list of all error warning and information codes with their meanings INFO 000 System was restarted System was restarted 010 Backup file A system backup file was generated automatically and sent via e mail to the Administrator 105 User Authentication deamon UA not running restarted 106 Cron Task Scheduler not running restarted 107 WebAdmin webserver not running restarted 108 ssh server not running restarted 109 license server not running r
273. rt and installation of the System Up2 Dates The HA system is described in chapter on page 98 49 Using the Security System Manually downloading System Up2Dates 1 Open the Up2Date Service menu in the System tab 2 In the System Up2Date window click the Start button under Prefetch Up2Dates now oe The system will now check if there are any new updates on the Update server and will download any updates found Details on the Up2Date process can be found in the Log Window shown in real time left hand picture When the DONE message appears the process has completed successfully The Unapplied Up2Dates table lists any updates that have been downloaded but not yet installed Done If you are using the HA system unapplied updates will be listed in the Unapplied Up2Dates Master window Automatic download of System Up2Dates 10pen the Up2Date Service menu in the System tab 2Click the Enable button under Prefetch Up2Dates automatically 16 In the selection menu Interval specify how often the security system should contact the Up2Date Server to check for new System Up2Dates The available choices are every hour every day or once per week 50 Using the Security System Newly imported Up2Date packages are presented with their respective version number and file name in the Unapplied Up2Dates table Further information is available by clicking the Info button Note that the Unapplied Up2Dates in the t
274. ry window will open 118 Make the following settings Name In the entry field enter a unique Service Group name This name will be used later for example to configure packet filter rules Allowed characters are The only allowed characters are alphanumeric characters minus space and underscore _ Names may be up to 39 characters long Type Select Service Group from the drop down menu Initial Members From the selection field select the services by pressing the Ctrl key on the keyboard and selecting the name with the mouse 119 Save the Service Group by clicking on the Add Definition button 115 Using the Security System After successful definition the new service group will appear in the service table Filters The Filters function allows you to filter Services with specific attributes from the table This function considerably enhances the management of networks with many services as services of a certain type can be presented in a concise way Filtering services 1Click on the Filters button The entry window will open 120 Enter the filter attributes in the fields listed You don t have to define all attributes Name If you want to filter the services by names enter the expression in the entry menu Protocol This drop down menu allows you to filter the services by specific protocols Source Port If you want to filter services by a specific source port enter it in this entry field Destination P
275. s for Intrusion Protection Patterns found Virus Pattern Up2Date failed Internal MD5Sum Error Could not create correct MD5Sums If the problem recurs please contact the support department of your firewall provider Intrusion Protection Pattern Up2Date failed Internal MD5Sum Error Could not create correct MD5Sums If the problem recurs please contact the support department of your firewall provider Pattern Up2Date failed Licence Check failed Your license could not be checked If the problem continues please contact the support department of your firewall provider Pattern Up2Date failed Restart of Virus Scanner failed If the problem continues please contact the support department of your firewall provider Pattern Up2Date failed MD5Sum Error occurred If the problem continues please contact the support department of your firewall provider System shut down due to full log file partition 850 851 860 Using the Security System The log file partition usag reached th specified value in percent To prevent the loss of important log files the system has been shut down automatically Pleas check th WebAdmin settings and or remove old log files Intrusion Protection Event A packet was identified that may be part of an intrusion The matching rule classified this as highest priority level Further information on the Intrusion Prevention event can be found in the
276. s public key and is signed with the private key of the CA The format for these certificates is defined in the X 509 standard In a certificate the CA certifies with its own signature that the public key belongs to the person or entity it says it does As the certificate contains information such as the name of the owner duration of validity issuing authority and the signature of the CA it can be seen as a kind of digital passport The WebAdmin Site Certi ficate menu allows you to create two certificates first a CA certificate which will ie snes be installed in your Hostname ot E kii meas browser and second the server certificate signed by the CA certificate which the system uses to authenticate itself to your browser These two certificates contain the company s data and the system s hostname 95 Using the Security System Creating a Certificate for WebAdmin 1Under the System tab open the WebAdmin Site Certificate menu 2In the Certificate Information menu enter the appropriate information for your firm Country Choose your country from the drop down menu State Choose the state or region where you are City Enter the name of city Organization Enter the company s name Section Enter the department E Mail Address Enter your e mail address 100 In the field Firewall Hostname enter the host name or IP address of the security system you use to access WebAdmin Example If you access WebAdmin through the
277. s user can use his LogonName and password to log on to services like the SOCKS Proxy The security system checks the user s DN and password If there is only one DN that corresponds to smith example com and if the supplied password is valid the user will be allowed to use the SOCKS proxy 79 Using the Security System If you wish to use Group Membership to control access rights complete the following steps to configure the Microsoft Active Directory Step 1 Creating a Security Group 72 73 74 75 a In the Microsoft Management Console click the domain with the right mouse button Example Domain example com With the left mouse button click New and then Group A new window will open labeled New Object Group Enter a unique name for the group in the Group name field Example socks_users for the SOCKS Proxy Under Group type select Security Save your settings by clicking OK You have now created a new Security Group named socks_users Step 2 Adding Users to the Group 80 Using the Security System HA IDM A OA As aA MAHMOAH A O AOA s df MYO Al A AK AO m A OW OA A OA OO f OA OAa OA A A
278. sage below This setting will only be displayed when the Monitor Interface Usage function is enabled Use the drop down menu to configure the lower threshold for the downlink Notify when downlink usage exceeds This setting will only be displayed when the Monitor Interface Usage function is enabled Use the drop down menu to configure the upper value for the downlink MTU Size The MTU is the size in bytes of the largest trans mittable packet MTU stands for Maximum Transfer Unit For connections using the TCP IP protocol the data will be grouped into packets A maximum size will be defined for these packets Packets larger than this value will be considered too long for the connection and fragmented into smaller ones before transmis sion These data packets will be sent again However the per 131 Using the Security System formance can be limited if the upper value is too low The largest possible MTU for an Ethernet interface is 1500 Bytes The following value is the default for the Standard Ethernet Interface 1500 Byte 133 Confirm these settings by clicking Add The system will now check the address and network mask for semantic validity After a successful check the new interface will appear in the Current Interface Status table The interface is not yet enabled status light is red 134 Enable the interface by clicking the status light The interface is now enabled status light shows green The Oper colu
279. sers menu 271 Using the Security System Advanced Settings Trusted Hosts Networks In the selection field a Global Whitelist can be defined with reliable hosts or networks which in this case are excluded from the following options e MIME Error Checking e Expression Filter e Sender Address Verification e Realtime Blackhole Lists RBL e Spam Protection This implicates that the necessary computing power for scans is reduced and that problematic hosts can be excluded from Content Scanning Trusted Senders with the hierarchical list trusted sender addresses can be excluded from the following functions e Greylisting e Sender Verification Security Note This function should only be used carefully since sender addresses can easily be falsified Max message size Enter the maximum message size for in and out bound mail messages Normal values are 20 or 40 MB Please note that the encoding used to transmit e mails can make the size of the message larger than the files sent DoS Protection In order to protect the security system against a Denial of Service DoS attack a maximum of 25 incoming concur 272 Using the Security System rent connections are supported The 26 connection will not be accepted By default the DoS Protection function is enabled Outgoing TLS Incoming connections are always TLS encrypted This function is used to strongly encrypt outgoing connections You must first co
280. serted into a header of the message Any messages blocked by the proxy will be shown in the Proxies Proxy Content Manager menu Enable the Virus Protection by clicking on the Enable button status light is green Spam Protection This option heuristically checks incoming e mail for characteristics suggestive of spam This system uses an internal database of heuristic tests and characteristics making the test inde pendent from sender information and also more reliable 246 Using the Security System When you use an upstream firewall it must allow traffic from the security system to the Internet on the following ports They are used for communication to the Spam Protection databases TCP Port 2703 UDP Port 6277 UDP Port 53 DNS Important Note Two Thresholds can be defined for the Spam Score This ensures that potential SPAM e mails are treated differently by the Firewall Default settings Thresholds Pass when Score exceeds 03 aggressive Quarantine when Score exceeds 05 reasonable The first threshold implicates that e mails from level 3 on are filtered but allowed through With the help of the attached Header the e mail on the mail server or in the e mail program of the recipient can be sorted or filtered For the second threshold the e mail will be accepted but put into quarantine Basically the Threshold with the higher level is treated more severely On busy systems the Spam Protection may require a la
281. ses to join the network except those on the list In the access control you only define those network cards that should not have access to the Wireless LAN A positive filter on the other hand first of all excludes all MAC addresses In the access control you define explicitly those network cards that are permitted to join the Wireless LAN 136 Using the Security System Security Note If at all possible a positive filter should be used which is by far safer The following settings are required to configure a wireless LAN PCMCIA card SSID An acronym for Service Set Identifier this is essentially the name of the network More than one wireless LAN can coexist in the same physical space provided that they have different names or use separate channels The name of a network can be chosen freely the only requirement is that it not contain any space characters If you are configuring a Wireless LAN Station interface to connect to an already existing wireless network this must be the name of that network The name can be up to 32 characters long Channel This system must be manually configured with the radio channel to use If other wireless networks are in the area you should chose an unused channel for your network Please also note that only certain channels may be used in certain countries USA amp Canada Spain 10 11 Japan WEP In order to use WEP encryption you will need at least one WEP key up to four can be us
282. sisting of alphanumeric minus and period characters are allowed Other characters for example _ are not allowed Security Note If you use SAM authentication make sure to disable the Guest account on your Windows domain Otherwise all username password combinations will be accepted as valid 73 Using the Security System 4 1 7 3 Active Directory NT Domain Membership In this authentication method the NTLM protocol is used NTLM stands for New Technology LAN Manager and is a further develop ment of the LAN manager protocol LM for the user authentication in Windows networks The Challenge Response based NTLM protocol is by default contained in the MS Windows 2000 XP and 2003 Server operating systems The Squid Proxy can authenticate users through this protocol With this authentication method a MS Windows NT 2000 Domain Controller DC is used for the evaluation of requests For further information on Domain Controller DC please refer to the intro duction of the User Authentication menu on page 66 The authentication method with NTML next to RADIUS also supports remote authentications The method with NTLM in comparison to RADIUS offers the advantage that due to the Single Sign On mechanism the user needn t always log in to the Internet with his User Name and Password The functioning of the domain connection method of NTML is completely different from the three other authentication methods on this security syste
283. splayed in real time in the Local Logs Browse menu or downloaded to your local computer Further information about the Local Logs menu can be found in chapter on page 326 307 Using the Security System L2TP over IPSec IP Pool This menu is used to de 10 227 183 0 fine which IP addresses SENENI PPTP hosts should be as signed to By default a network from the private IP range 10 x x x will be selected when the L2TP over IPSec function is enabled for the first time This network is referred to as IPSec Pool and can also be used for all other functions of the Security system using network definitions If you wish to use a different network simply change the definition of the I PSec Pool or assign another defined network as IPSec Poo here Note If you use private IP addresses for your IPSec Pool such as the pre defined network and you wish IPSec hosts to be allowed to access the Internet appropriate Masquerading or NAT rules must be in place for the IPSec Pool L2TP over IPSec Client Parameters LITP over IPSec Client Parameters This window allows you to define DNS and WINS ser vers which should be as signed to hosts when the connection is established 308 Using the Security System 4 7 6 CA Management A Certificate Authority CA certifies the authenticity of public keys This ensures that the certificate used in a VPN connection really belongs to the endpoint and not to an attacker The C
284. ss for example 00 04 76 26 65 4C 145 Close the command prompt If you have a larger network you can use the ping program under MS Windows to determine the MAC addresses of remote nodes 1Make sure that the remote computer whose MAC address you wish to check is turned on and connected to the network 138 Using the Security System 146 Open the Command Prompt The Command Prompt can be found in the Start menu under Programs Accessories Command Prompt 147 Ping the destination computer by using the following command ping IP Address e g ping 192 168 2 15 148 Press the Enter key If the destination computer is reachable you will receive the ping replies and some information about network latency 149 Enter the following command arp g 150 Press the Enter key Your computer s local ARP table will now be displayed The Physical Address column of this table shows the MAC address for each known IP address In order to connect to a remote computer on the same subnet the local computer addresses Ethernet frames to the remote computer s MAC address In order to do this it must first determine the remote hardware address by issuing an ARP request When you issue the ping request your local computer automatically determines the remote computer s MAC address and stores it in the local ARP table for future use If you wish to configure a PCMCIA Card for the Wireless LAN as an Access Point complete the following steps Configur
285. ssion Filter This function allows to filter all e mail texts and attached text files that pass through the POP3 proxy by specific expressions The expressions are defined in the check list in the form of Perl Compatible Regular Expressions 249 Using the Security System 4 6 5 Ident ary The Ident protocol allows tatu eu osabie _ Bi ax external servers to asso ciate a username with given TCP connections While this connection is not encrypted it is nevertheless necessary for many services If you enable the Ident function the security system supports Ident queries The system will always reply with the string that you define as Default Response irrespective from which local service the connection will be started Forward Connections Ident queries cannot be answered through Connection Tracking You can get around this difficulty if you use the Masquerading function in that case the Forward Connection function will pass the ident request on to the internal masquerading host Please note however that the actual internal IP address will not be released Instead the system will query the internal machine and simply pass the response string to the remote server This is often useful for internal clients with a mini ident server such as the ones often included in IRC and FTP clients 250 Using the Security System 4 6 6 SMTP An SMTP Proxy allows you to protect an internal mail server from re
286. staro security system in detail it may be helpful to take an overview of network and security technology in general In particular it is important to understand the serious risks that unprotected systems face as well as where and how to deploy this security system to mitigate these risks Networks The Internet is already well established as a vital communications medium and a key marketplace for both traditional and new services Since its inception its size has multiplied with domain name growth between 1995 and 2003 reaching almost exponential proportions Computers on this worldwide network communicate using the Inter net Protocol IP as well as various higher level protocols such as TCP UDP and ICMP IP addresses uniquely identify each of the computers reachable on the network The Internet itself is a collection of smaller networks of various kinds When two or more networks are connected a number of issues arise which are dealt with by devices such as routers bridges and gateways A firewall is another such device designed with security in mind As a rule three kinds of network meet at the firewall e An external or Wide Area Network WAN e An internal or Local Area Network LAN e A De Militarized Zone DMZ An example configuration is shown on the next page Installation External Network T IW iE Internet Internal Network WN Firewall Web FTP E Mail Server Server S
287. stem tab open the WebAdmin Settings menu 2Make the following settings After failed Attempts Select the maximum allowable number of attempts in the drop down menu Block IP for Period Enter the time span for the blocking protection in the entry field 99 Save your changes by clicking Save Now the blocking protection is enabled The Never block Networks window allows you to exclude networks or hosts from the blocking protection 94 Using the Security System 4 1 9 WebAdmin Site Certificate Encryption systems are an important part of many modern security systems They are used for example when transmitting confidential information over Virtual Private Networks in chapter on page 280 in User Authentication and Up2Date Service or to securely administer the security system over the network Certificates and Certificate Authorities CA are an essential part of modern cryptographic protocols and help close the gaps left open by other systems Public Key Algorithms offer a particularly elegant form of encryption They do however presuppose that the public keys of all communications partners are known At this point a third trusted party is used to ensure the validity of public keys The third party issues certificates guaranteeing the authenticity of these keys this third party is called a Certificate Authority CA A certificate is a record in a standardized format with the owner s most important data his name and hi
288. stination address is on the local network or if traffic must be sent via a router and if a router is to be used the table details which router is to be used for which network Static Routes The security system will install static routing entries for directly connected networks by itself Further routes however must be manually entered This is the case for instance when the local network includes a router to be used for access to a specific network These routes called static routes contain information about how to contact a non directly connected network This menu allows you to define which network card or router should be used to contact various external networks Defining Static Routes 1Under the Network tab open the Routing menu 2Click on the New button The Add Static Route window will open 191 In the Network drop down menu choose the network you wish to define a route for The Network drop down menu contains all static networks as well as those you have defined in the Networks and Interfaces menus 166 Using the Security System 192 In the Target drop down menu select the destination to which packets should be forwarded Names in brackets are interfaces while names without are hosts or routers Names without brackets are either hosts or routers 193 Save your changes by clicking Save When a new route has been defined and saved it will appear in the Static Routes table To remove an
289. sts and which in addition to that is always reachable The security system will send ping requests to this host if no answer is received the backup interface will be enabled by the failover In this entry field there must always be an IP address for the failover 129 Using the Security System Monitor Interface Usage This function monitors the band width on the interface Once the bandwidth falls short of or exceeds a specific value a notification e mail will be sent to the administrator The maximum available bandwidth must be entered for the Monitor Interface Usage function into the Uplink Bandwidth kbits and Downlink Bandwidth kbits entry fields The notification e mail to the administrator will be sent as soon as the actually available bandwidth falls off or exceeds a predefined limit value The limit values are configured with the Notify drop down menus The settings will only be displayed once the Monitor Interface Usage function is enabled On QoS Status In order to use Quality of Service QoS band width management on an interface enable this option To enable the Quality of Service QoS function select On from the drop down menu For the bandwidth management Quality of Service QoS you must define the values for Uplink Bandwidth kbits and Downlink Bandwidth kbits These values are used as basis for the bandwidth management system incorrect values can lead to poor management of the data flow The Quali
290. subnet and must be able to contact the administration computer In our example assume the gateway is at 192 168 2 1 Gateway 192 168 2 1 If the administration computer is on the same subnet as the internal network card in our example if its address is Installation 192 168 2 x it does not need a gateway In this case enter the following value here Gateway none Confirm your entries with the Enter key 7 License Agreement Step 6 Note Please read the license agreement carefully I Press F8 to agree to the terms of the license 8 Final Notes Step 7 Attention Please read the notes and warnings presented during the I installation carefully After confirming them all existing data on the PC will be destroyed If you wish to change your entries press F12 to return to Step 1 Otherwise start the installation process by pressing the F8 key 9 Installing the Software Step 8 The software installation process can take up to a couple of minutes You can follow the progress of the installation using the four monitoring consoles There are four consoles available Main Installation Alt F1 Interactive bash Shell 1 Alt F2 Installation Log Alt F3 Kernel Log Alt F4 When the installation process completes remove the CD ROM from the drive and connect the ethO network card to the internal network 19 Installation 10 Except for the internal network card ethO the sequence of
291. system supports only one DSL connection A failover for the Internet access can for example consist of a permanent communication line and a DSL access If the primary connection fails the Uplink will automatically be performed by the second Internet con nection In order to monitor the connection the primary network card sends four ping requests to the Uplink Failover check IP every five seconds Only if all four ping requests are not replied to the Backup Interface is loaded When the Internet connection is established via the Backup Interface the ping requests are still sent by the Primary Inter face As soon as the security system receives the corresponding 157 Using the Security System reply packages again the Internet connection is again estab lished by the Primary Interface When the Uplink Failover on Interface function is used two g different networks must be defined on the Primary and Backup Interface Therefore you need next to the additional network card for the Backup Interface two separate Internet accesses Important Note Uplink Failover on Interface is by default disabled Off If you wish to use this virtual interface as primary connection select Primary Interface from the drop down menu If this interface shall contain the standby connection select the Backup Interface configuration Uplink Failover check IP This entry field will be displayed if the Primary Interface setting has been selected for the
292. t Each of these approaches has advantages and disadvantages which must be balanced according to cost and security requirements Internet VPN client for remote access 10 Installation Virtual Private Networks VPN provide a cost effective solution to this problem they can connect LANs over the Internet using en crypted connections thus enabling secure transparent end to end communication without the need for leased lines This is especially useful when an organization has many branch offices connected to the Internet IPSec technology provides a standard model for these secure connections These secure connections can be used automatically independent of the data being transferred this protects the data without requiring extra configuration or passwords on the client systems At the other end of the connec tion the data is transparently de or anoiestion caver Application Level coded and forwarded to the recipi ent in its original form ISO OSI TCP IP 6 Presentation Layer The Firewall component of this 5 Session Layer security system is a hybrid of the 4 Transport Layer Transmisslon Level preceding protection mechanisms combining the advantages of 3 Network Layer Internet Level IP ICMP each 2 Data Link Layer Bawor Leyal The Stateful Inspection Packet Filter offers the platform indepen dent flexibility to define enable and disable all necessary services 1 Physical Layer The Proxi
293. t Filter Logs The log files are saved to the Local Logs Browse menu Packet filter vielations Daily 4 8 6 Content Filter The processed data and actions of the Content Filter relating to the HTTP SMTP and POP3 proxies will be displayed in the form of tables and diagrams in this menu The Spam Protection option and the Spam Score are described in chapter on page 265 Information on the SMTP and POP3 proxies e Sum of the treated messages e The average size of messages in kilobytes e The average height of Spam Score Information on the HTTP proxy e Sum of requested HTTP sites e Sum of the HTTP sites blocked by Surf Protection e Sum of the HTTP sites blocked by Virus Protection 320 Using the Security System 4 8 7 PPTP IPSec VPN The PPTP and IPSec VPN connections will be displayed in a graphic in this menu 4 8 8 Intrusion Protection Intrusion Protection events will be displayed in a graphic in this menu 4 8 9 DNS The DNS Query statistic is represented in this menu 4 8 10 HTTP Proxy Usage The access to the HTTP Proxy is recorded in this menu 4 8 11 Executive Report In the Executive Report menu a complete report is created from the individual reports in the Reporting tab Daily Executive Report by E Mail Once a day an updated complete report is sent to the e mail addresses en tered into the ordered list The function is automatically enabled once an address has been entered into the field
294. t of an intrusion The matching rule classified this as low priority level Further information on the Intrusion Prevention event can be found in the notification e mail Intrusion Protection Event Event buffering activated A packet was identified that may be part of an intrusion The matching rule classified this as low priority level Event buffering has been activated Further Intrusion Protection events will be collected and sent to you when the collection period has expired If more events occur this period will be increased Further information on the Intrusion Prevention event can be found in the notification e mail Portscan detected A portscan was detected The originating host was lt IP gt A portscan from the given IP address was de tected The Portscan Detection function is de scribed in chapter on page 190 347 Using the Security System 856 999 348 For more information see WebAdmin gt Local Logs Browse Portscan search with whois to know who the source IP belongs to gt RIPE NCC http www ripe net perl whois query SHOST gt ARIN http www arin net cgi bin whois pl queryinput HOST gt APNIC http cgi apnic net apnic bin whois pl search HOST use traceroute from gt UC Berkeley http www net berkeley edu cgi bin traceroute HOST Attention source IP addresses can easily be forged by attackers Portscan detect
295. t of rules 4 4 1 Settings Global Settings In the window configure the basic settings for the Intrusion Protection Sys tem IPS option Status Clicking on the Enable button enables the option Local Networks From the selection field select those networks that should be monitored by the Intrusion Protection System IPS If no specific network is selected the complete data traffic will be monitored Portscan Detection Portscan Detection The Portscan Detection aa Dabio PSD feature allows you to detect possible attacks from unauthorized users Portscans are used by hackers to probe secured systems for available services In order to intrude into a system or to start a Denial of Service DoS attack attackers need information on network services If this information is available attackers might make use of the security 190 Using the Security System deficiencies of these services Network services using the TCP and UDP Internet protocols can be accessed via special ports and this port assignment is generally known for example the SMTP service is generally assigned to the TCP Port 25 The ports used by the services are referred to as open since it is possible to establish a connection to them Whereas unused ports are referred to as closed every attempt to connect with them fails The attacker tries to find the open ports with the help of a particular software tool i e the Port Scanner This program tr
296. tain the following modules e Base license Packet Filter VPN Gateway and Intrusion Protection e Maintenance amp Support Up2Date Service e High Availability e Secure E Mail Subscription Spam Protection Virus Protection for E Mail Phishing Protection e Secure Web Subscription Surf Protection Virus Protection for Web The price of the company version depends on the size of the network to be protected the scope of support and the modules subscribed to in addition to the base license For more information please visit our website under http www novell com products securitymanager 45 Using the Security System Licensing the Internet security system In order to license the Internet security system you need a valid license string on the local host so that you can enter it to the Internet security system through the WebAdmin configuration tool Note When using a license with the High Availability HA option you must enter the License strings to both security systems Normal and Hot Standby mode 10pen the Licensing menu in the System tab 2Enter the license string s in the License Strings entry field 15 Click on the Save button The system will require between 30 and 60 seconds to process this information After successful registration the Installed Licenses window will contain the details of your license Installed Licenses After successful registration of the Internet security system the Install
297. te computer The installation process depends on the IPSec software on that computer 313 Using the Security System 4 7 7 Advanced This menu allows you to make additional settings for the IPSec VPN option This should however only be done by experienced users NAT Traversal When en abled NAT Traversal allows hosts to establish an IPSec tunnel through NAT devices This function attempts to detect if NAT firewalls are being used between the server and client if so the system will use UDP packets to communicate with the remote host Please note that both IPSec nodes must support NAT traversal and that road warrior nodes must be configured with a virtual IP address In addition IPSec passthrough must be turned off on the NAT device s as this can break NAT traversal You cannot use local IP addresses for the Virtual IP address Important Note B because the security system does not answer ARP requests for these Copy TOS Flag Type of Service Bits TOS are several four Bit flags in the IP header The Bits are referred to as Type of Service Bits as they allow the transferring application to tell the network which type of service quality is necessary The available service quality classes are minimum delay maximum throughput maximum reliability and minimum cost This function copies the content of the Type of Service field in the encrypted data packet so that the IPSec data traffic can be route
298. ted through BATV is valid only for seven days In the Feature Settings window additional settings for the BATV function can be made Use Greylisting Typically a mail server using Greylisting will record the following three pieces of information for all incoming mail which is also known as Triplet e The sender address e The IP address of the host it is sent from e The recipient address This triplet is checked against the SMTP proxy s internal data base if the triplet has never been seen before it is created within the database getting a special time stamp This triplet causes the e mail to be rejected for a period of time of five minutes This action is called Greylisting After that period of time the triplet is known and the mail will be accepted when it is sent again Greylisting uses the fact that most senders of Spam Mails use software working according to the Fire and Forget method Attempt to deliver the mail and if it doesn t work forget it This means that senders of spam mail do not try to send mails again when there is a 257 Using the Security System Temporary Failures in contrast to RFC conforming mails servers If the time stamp is older than five minutes the e mail will immediately be delivered and the time stamp will be updated with the current time minus five minutes Verify Recipient This function is used to compare the receiver ad dresses of ingoing e mails with the addresses on your Backend Mail
299. ted together on VLAN 20 weneuse tagged The two switches must be configured as follows Switch a Switch b Port tagged errs T 1o 20 2 PC1 U 2 E U 3 PC2 U 3 PC5 U 4 PC3 U 4 PC6 U 5 T t In this configuration it seems to PC3 as though it were connected through a single switch to PC5 and PC6 In order to connect the computers to an external network e g the Internet the interface on the security system in the example this is eth2 must be configured to support the VLANs 146 Using the Security System Attention In order to configure a Virtual LAN interface you will need a net m work card with a tag capable driver The hardware supported by the security system is listed in the Hardware Compatibility List for Novell Security Manager powered by Astaro available at http www novell com documentation nsma51 Configuring a Virtual LAN 1In the Network tab open the Interfaces menu 2Click on the New button The Add Interface window will open 165 In the Name entry field enter a descriptive name for the interface 166 Use the Hardware drop down menu to select a network card 167 Use the drop down menu Type to select VLAN Ethernet interface 168 Fill in the required settings for the VLAN Ethernet Interface type of interface Address Assign an IP address for the virtual interface If you wish to use a static IP address for this interface select Static from the drop down menu and
300. ternal clients This includes login and authentication infor mation as well as error messages If you select the Extensive parameter in the Logging function of the Network PPTP VPN Access menu these logs will contain very detailed information about PPP connections Selfmonitoring The Selfmonitoring continually checks the integrity of the firewall systems and notifies the administrator of 342 Using the Security System important events Self monitoring checks the function performance and security of relevant system parameters and remedies deviations exceeding given tolerances Subsequently a report will be sent to the competent administrator by e mail This Selfmonitoring of the security system ensures that central services such as the Syslog Daemon HTTP Proxy and Network Accounting are functioning properly Access rights to files are monitored as is the resource usage of individual processes This is designed to prevent an overload of the system Moreover the system administrator is informed in time on previsible resource bottlenecks if for example the available disk space is running short This allows for an early implementation of measures in favor of a system extension and or discharge SMTP proxy The activities of the SMTP proxy are recorded to these log files All ingoing e mails will be listed there In addition all irregularities such as assigned Bounce conditions interruptions or blocked e mails will be logged SOCKS p
301. the Configuration Manager Password Halt System will shut down the Security system After the restart the Setting System Passwords window will be displayed at first The Factory Reset function resets all configuration settings and op tions to their original state All data entered after the initial instal lation will be deleted including the HTTP Proxy Cache the entire E Mail Queue Accounting and Reporting data passwords and uninstalled Up2Dates The software version will not change That is all System Up2Dates and Pattern Up2Dates that have been installed will be retained 4 1 2 Licensing 44 Using the Security System Novell Security Manager powered by Astaro ships with a seven day evaluation license included No action is required to implement this license If further evaluation is necessary beyond seven days a 90 day demo license is available from Novell at http download novell com The demo license activates all features of Novell Security Manager powered by Astaro including the base product e Up2Date Service e Spam Protection e Virus Protection for E Mail e Phishing Protection e Surf Protection e Virus Protection for Web If you decide after the expiry of the demo license to use the security system for your company you ll need the base license This base license can then be completed with up to four functions and security packages This base license and the four functions and security packages con
302. the Log function Comment In this entry field you can optionally enter a comment on a rule 229 Save your configuration by clicking Add Definition If the definition was successful the new Packet filter rule will be added to the rule table in a deactivated state marked by the red status light 230 Activate the Packet filter rule by clicking the status light After the rule is added to the table further options are available for managing and editing rules in the rules table 203 Using the Security System Note By default new rules are added in an inactive state in the table The rule will only become effective when it is set to be active See Activating deactivating rules The Rules Table Each packet filter rule will be displayed in the table through a separate line The different settings will either be displayed as alpha numeric signs or as symbols While all settings with alphanumeric signs can be edited by clicking on the correspondent field this is not possible with all symbol displays E Group Serice Action Destination Comment a 1 none BO Aarketing Network p HTTP j Any Ke Example rule The following table explains all symbols from the rules table The Symbols Icon Column Display Setting a GG status tight Packet filter rule is disabled GG Status ligt Packet filter rule is enabled Source Destination Network group 204 Using the Security System Jeon C
303. the Security System 4 6 1 HTTP 9 The HTTP menu allows you to configure the security system as a HTTP Caching Proxy This proxy can pro vide caching services in ad dition to simple proxy ser vices resulting in dramatic performance increases be cause the system can store a copy of often visited pages locally these pages do not need to be loaded across the Internet Disabie Note wevaamin should not be used through a proxy Configure your browser so that connections to the security system s IP address do not use a proxy server Disabling Netscape Communicator Proxy 1In Netscape open the Edit Settings Advanced Proxies menu 2Under Manual Proxy Configuration click Show 237 In the No Proxy for this address field enter the IP address of your security system 238 Click OK to save your changes 221 Using the Security System Disabling Proxy Use with Microsoft Explorer 1In Explorer open the Extras Internet Options menu 2Choose the Connections tab 239 Open the LAN Settings Advanced menu 240 Under Exceptions enter the IP Address of your security system 241 Click OK to save your settings The HTTP proxy controls web transactions using the HTTP protocol usually TCP IP Port 80 Please note that some web servers transmit some data in particular streaming video and audio over a port other than 80 These requests will not be noticed when the proxy is in Transparent
304. the use of dynamic IP addresses The IKE protocol automatically manages the Security Associations SAs for a connection This system supports three kinds of authentication for IKE 287 Using the Security System e IKE with Preshared Keys PSK e IKE with RSA Keys RSA e IKE with X 509v3 Certificates X 509 Authentication with Preshared Keys PSK uses secret passwords as keys these passwords must be distributed to the endpoints before the connection is built When a new VPN tunnel is built each side checks that the other knows the secret password The security of such PSKs depends on how good the passwords used are common words and phrases are subject to dictionary attacks Permanent or long term IPSec connections should use certificates or RSA keys instead Authentication via RSA Keys is much more sophisticated In this scheme each side of the connection generates a key pair consisting of a Public Key and a Private Key The private key is necessary for the encryption and authentication during the Key Exchange Both keys are mathematically independent from each other and are in a unique relation to each other Data encrypted with one key can only be decrypted with the other The Private Key cannot be deducted with maintainable work from the Public Key Both receivers of an IPSec VPN connection require in this authenti cation method their own Public Key and Private Key Similarly the X 509 Certificate authentication scheme
305. thentication with the security system 1 Check that the IAS service is installed If it is not install it now 2 Create a user group for every proxy to be used 68 55 56 57 58 59 Using the Security System Tip rane the group according to the proxy to be used For example name the group for the HTTP Proxy HTTP Proxy Users For each group add the users who should be allowed to use this proxy service Make sure that the user flag Allow dial in access to the network is set for every user in these groups You can find this setting in the user properties dialog box MS Windows NT 2000 needs this flag to answer RADIUS inquiries Open the administration program for the IAS service Add a client This requires the following information Client Name Enter the DNS name of your security system here Protocol Choose RADIUS IP Address of the Client Enter the internal IP address of the security system Client Vendor Choose RADIUS Standard Shared Secret Enter a password here You will need this pass word again when configuring the RADIUS server with Web Admin Security Note For the Shared Secret only passwords consisting of alphanumeric minus and period characters are allowed Other characters for example _ are not allowed Now open the RAS rules menu A standard rule is listed here If you intend to use IAS only with the security system you can delete this entry 69 Using t
306. timates messages such as HTML Newsletters will be blocked It is possible to set a value between 1 and 15 in the drop down menu With level 1 the e mails are already treated with a low spam score The following Levels serve as clue 266 Aggressive 03 This strategy will catch most spam messages It may also identify some legitimate messages for example HTML newsletters as spam Reasonable 05 This strategy is a compromise between Aggressive and Reasonable Using the Security System Conservative 08 This strategy will only catch messages that are highly likely to be spam Legitimate messages are unlikely to be caught do this This drop down menu allows you to select the action the proxy should take upon finding a message with a filtered string The following actions are possible Reject The message will be bounced back to the sender with a 5xx error message The bounce message sent to the sender will also contain an explanation of why the message was blocked Blackhole The e mail will be accepted and silently dropped Do not use this action unless you are absolutely certain no legitimate e mails will be lost Quarantine The e mail will be accepted but kept in quarantine The e mail will be displayed in the Proxy Content Manger menu with the status Quarantine This menu presents further options including options to read or send a mail securely Pass The e mail will be treated by the filter but allowed to pass A Hea
307. tion 1 Rule for data packets from the web server Source web server Service HTTP To Server Internet Action Allow high priority 2 Rule for data packets from the FTP server Source FTP server Service FTP Destination Internet Action Allow high priority M arketing p amp Example Rule FTP Server GB QoS Example Rule Web Server B QoS Example Rule If the Uplink is only used by the data packets of these two servers each connection receives one half of the bandwidth 1MBit s in the Worst Case The High Priority setting becomes only relevant if a third data connection is established All connections with a lower priority Allow or Allow low priority will be treated with a lower ranking 208 Using the Security System Additional Functions and Settings Internet wide Broadcast In order to drop IP broadcast packets first define the broadcast address in the Definitions Networks menu in the form of a new network Next install the appropriate packet filter rule and activate it 1Under Definitions open the Networks menu and define the following network Name Broadcast32 Type Host IP Address 255 255 255 255 Comment optional Enter a comment 233 Confirm the entries by clicking Add Definition 234 Under Packet Filter open the Rules menu and enter the following rule Source Any Service Any Destination Broadcast32 Action Drop Comment optional Enter a comment 235 Confirm the e
308. to configure packet filter rules Allowed characters are The only allowed characters are alphanumeric characters minus space and underscore _ Names may be up to 39 characters long Type Select IPsec User Group from the drop down menu DN Template For the VPN ID Type Distinguished Name you will need the following data from the X 509 tab tree Country C State ST Local L Organization O Unit OU Common 110 Using the Security System Name CN and E Mail Address E The data must be listed in the same order as a certificate in this entry field Comment You can enter a IPsec user group description in this entry field 112 Save the IPsec user group by clicking on the Add Definition button After successful definition the new IPSec user group will appear in the network table The IPSec user group name will also be available for use in various configuration menus Filters The Filters function allows you to filter networks or hosts with specific attributes from the table This function considerably enhances the management of huge net works as networks of a certain type can be presented in a concise way Filtering networks 1Click on the Filters button The entry window will open 113 Enter the filter attributes in the fields listed You don t have to define all attributes Name If you want to filter the networks by names enter the expression in the entry menu Type Use this drop down men
309. to establish a connection with an already existing Wireless LAN you must enter the existing network name Use WEP If you wish to use WEP encryption on the wireless LAN select Yes from the drop down menu Security Note You should always use WEP encryption as an unencrypted network presents a serious threat to network security If you select No from the drop down menu the WEP specific configuration options will be ignored by the system WEP Authentication If you wish to enable WEP authentication select Yes from the drop down menu All nodes on the wireless network must be configured with the correct WEP Key Require WEP If you do not wish to allow nodes not supporting WEP onto the wireless network choose Yes here 143 Using the Security System WEP Key Enter the WEP key to use in the WEP Key 0 through 3 entry fields In order to use WEP encryption you will need at least one WEP key up to four can be used For a 40 bit key enter a string with 5 hexadecimal digits separated by colons In order to use a 104 bit key enter a string of 13 hexadecimal digits separated by colons The string must consist of hexadecimal digits Please note that a hexadecimal number is two characters each either a number 0 9 or a letter A F Example of a 40 bit key 17 A5 6B 45 23 Default WEP Key Use the drop down menu to choose one of the defined WEP Keys 0 3 which should be used as the default key This key will be used as the current key whi
310. tocol DHCP automatically distributes ad dresses from a defined IP ad dress pool to client com puters It is designed to sim plify network configuration on large networks and to pre vent address conflicts DHCP distributes IP addresses de fault gateway information and DNS configuration infor mation to its clients In addition to simplifying the configuration of client computers and allowing mobile computers to move painlessly between networks DHCP helps to localize and troubleshoot IP address related problems as these are mostly issues with the configuration of the DHCP server itself It also allows for a more effective use of address space especially when not all computers will be active at the same time as addresses can be distributed as needed and re used when unneeded Configuring the DHCP Server 1In the Network tab open the DHCP Server menu 2In the Interface drop down menu select the interface from which the IP addresses should be assigned to the clients 206 Click Enable next to Status to enable the function Another entry window will open 207 Use the Range Start and Range End menus to set the address space from which IP addresses will be distributed 176 Using the Security System By default the configured address area of the network card will appear in the entry field The settings will take effect without further confirmation Assigning DNS servers Gateway IP and WINS server You can tr
311. troduction LDAP advanced LDAP server Microsoft IAS RADIUS configuration NTLM RADIUS SAM SAM NT 2000 XP configuration Users Val We 378 adding local users deleting definitions editing definitions filtering filters introduction idate Packet Length bAdmin access and authentication block password guessing configuring blocking protection for Loggin attempts drop down menus general settings HTTPS 50 51 39 118 120 120 119 119 117 217 93 94 94 33 92 92 info box kick lists menus online help refresh selection field selection table starting status light tab list WebAdmin Site Certificate creating installing introduction DHCP Server static mappings Interfaces determining MAC addresses wireless LAN station IPSec VPN configuring configuring a policy defining remote keys generate a client host certificate Load Balancing defining rules Masquerading defining rules Microsoft Outlook creating rules Packet Filter Rules setting Ping Using Reporting Accounting configuring SOCKS Glossary 178 138 142 291 298 304 311 174 173 268 201 189 323 379 Glossary user authentication 244 380 Notes
312. troductions RM Remote Syslog Server introduction Reporting accounting administration content filter current report daily executive report by e mail DNS executive report hardware HTTP proxy usage Intrusion Protection network packet filter PPTP IPSec VPN system information virus Restart RM historical RM log files Report Manager RM RM remote connection transfer method Routing introduction kernel routing table Search starting a search Glossary 277 274 275 275 276 275 275 207 326 326 64 322 317 320 322 321 321 321 318 321 321 319 320 321 324 318 105 328 327 328 329 166 167 358 375 Glossary Search Secure Shell Services adding defining service group deleting definitions editing definitions filtering filters introduction Settings Shut down Shut down Restart SMTP advanced settings configure content filter deny RCPT hacks domain adding and editing domain groups domain groups table DoS protection editing domain profile expression filter feature settings file extension filter MIME error checking outgoing TLS profiles and domain group assignment table route target scan outgoing messages sender blacklist SMTP authentication Spam Protection SPF fail check use BATV use greylisting use RBL use smarthost verify recipient 376 358 43 44 114 115 117 117 116 116 113 39 105 105 272 252 260 256 254 252
313. try C State ST Local L Organization O Unit UO Common Name CN and E Mail Address E Mail To save the new IPSec remote key object click Add The new remote key object will appear in the Remote Keys table CA Management Remote Keys are shown in a separate table 306 Using the Security System 4 7 5 L2TP over IPSec L2TP over IPSec is a combination of the Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol and of the IPSec standard protocol L2TP over IPSec allows you while providing the same functions as PPTP to give individual hosts access to your network through an encrypted IPSec tunnel On Microsoft Windows systems L2TP over IPSec is easy to set up and requires no special client software For the MS Windows systems 98 ME and NT Workstation 4 0 Microsoft L2TP IPSec VPN Client must first be installed This client is available from Microsoft at http www microsoft com windows2000 server evaluation news bull etins I2tpclient asp L2TP over IPSec Settings Authentication Use this drop down menu to con figure the authentication method If you have defined a RADIUS server in the System User Authentication menu you can use it here as well The configuration of the Microsoft IAS RADIUS server and the configuration of RADIUS within WebAdmin is described in chapter on page 66 Debugging This function allows you to check the L2TP over IPSec connection Detailed information is logged to the IPSec logs These protocols can be di
314. tself 273 In the other columns configure the Spam Protection functions for this profile The functions are explained in section Profiles and Domain Group Assignment Table The Domain Profile is now assigned to a domain group and edited The settings will be immediately effective and without further confirmation Feature Settings In the Feature Settings windows there are ad ditional settings for the Spam Protection func tions in the Profiles and Domain Group Assign ment table RBL Zones Enter the Internet addresses of the databases for the Use RBL function into the control list The function of the Control List is identical to the Ordered List and described in chapter on page 34 259 Using the Security System BATV Secret The automatically generated Security Key can also be defined manually If you use several firewalls as MX the same Security Key must be entered on all systems BATV skip Recipients Enter the recipients that should receive un signed messages into the control list This is needed for instance when posting on mailing lists that make use of the envelope sender address The disadvantage is that you don t get bounces from the addresses entered in this field BATV skip Senders Enter the senders that are allowed to send un signed messages into the control list Greylist skip Recipients Enter the recipients that are exempted from greylisting into the control list 4 6 6 1 Content Filter S
315. twork s status and other control information Many users are already familiar with ICMP echo requests type 8 and echo replies type 0 as these are used by the ping program When a computer receives an echo request its IP stack sends back an echo reply This is done with the ping program in order to determine whether another network component is reachable IP The Internet Protocol is the basic protocol of the Internet and has been used without change since it was first developed in 1974 It handles the basic transmission of data from one computer to another and serves as the basis for higher level protocols like TCP and UDP It handles the connection and error management Technologies like NAT and Masquerading allow large private networks to hide behind small numbers of IP addresses or even single addresses thus allowing the relatively limited IPv4 address space to meet the demands of an ever expanding Internet 362 Glossary IP Address Every publicly addressable host on the Internet has a unique IP address similar to a telephone number An IP address consists of decimal numbers separated by points Possible numbers are 0 to 255 Inel Sive orcas eck oes Ses a Example a possible IP address is 192 168 2 15 At least one IP name in the form hostname subdomain s domain e g kises rz uni konstanz de is assigned to an IP address This refers to a computer named kises which stands in the sub domain rz of the sub domain u
316. twork Management Protocol SNMP monitors and manages the local network SNMP allows the administrator to make quick queries about the condition of the network devices such as the number and configuration of the network interfaces the forwarded traffic the current processes and hard disk utilization Next to the current state tendencies and time rows are interesting They give a detailed insight into the functions of a network the history can be monitored and remedied before turning into a real problem Configure the access rights to the SNMP service in the SNMP Access window The users of the configured networks can then conduct queries about the SNMP server on the security system with their read only rights Security Note The SNMP data traffic Protocol version 2 between the Security system and the network is not encrypted Authorizing Access to the SNMP Server 1 Enable SNMP Access by clicking the Enable button 62 Using the Security System 2 From the Allowed Networks selection field select the networks that you wish to allow for accessing the SNMP server 49 Enter the Community String in this entry field 50 Save your configuration by clicking Save In the SNMP Traps window you can define a SNMP Trap assignment mom a Trap Server to which 3 192 168 2150 pub relevant information for the system administration is sent as SNMP Traps To recognize those Traps a special SNMP monitoring software is r
317. twork cards on both the normal and standby systems which support this function Important Note Device IP Assign an IP address from a Class C network to each security system within the HA device group The IPs must be within an address range and may only be used once within a given device group Example The Device IP 10 0 14 1 is as signed to the Internet security system 1 and the Device IP 10 0 14 2 to security system 2 102 Using the Security System Note The data transfer connection must only use a Class C network that is a network with mask 255 255 255 0 The bitmask form cannot be entered here The network defined for the data transfer cannot be used anywhere else Serial Interface optional In addition to watching the data transfer connection the standby system can monitor the active system through the serial interface No data is transferred over this connection Select the appropriate serial interface from the drop down menu Note When you save the settings as described in the following the system will shut down and reboot immediately Save your changes by clicking on the Save button System 1 will now restart If a keyboard is connected the Num Lock LED will blink on the keyboard When the system gets into the Hot Standby mode the system will beep twice and the LED will stop blinking Because system 2 is still disabled system 1 will boot normally into normal mode and the Num Lock light will blink
318. ty of Service QoS function is described in chapter Important Note Uplink Bandwidth kbits This setting will only appear if the QoS or Monitor Interface Usage function is enabled In this entry menu enter the available bandwidth for the Uplink in full kilobits This value can be determined either from the values of the upstream interface or from the router On an interface to the Internet this value corresponds to the bandwidth of the Internet connection on an ADSL access the Uplink bandwidth amounts 130 Using the Security System to 128 kBit s and on a 2 Megabit fixed connection to 2048 kBit s Downlink Bandwidth kbits This setting will only appear if the QoS or Monitor Interface Usage function is enabled In this entry menu enter the available bandwidth for the Downlink in full kilobits On an interface to the Internet this value corresponds to the bandwidth of the Internet connection on an ADSL access the Downlink bandwidth amounts to 768 kBit s and on a 2 Megabit fixed connection to 2048 kBit s Notify when uplink usage below This setting will only be displayed when the Monitor Interface Usage function is enabled Use the drop down menu to configure the lower threshold for the uplink Notify when uplink usage exceeds This setting will only be displayed when the Monitor Interface Usage function is enabled Use the drop down menu to configure the upper threshold for the uplink Notify when downlink u
319. u 244 In the Log level drop down menu choose the appropriate level of logging Full All relevant information is recorded Access Log only The log only records access information for example URL accessed and username IP address of the client None No information about the proxy use is recorded 245 The Anonymity drop down menu allows you to choose how much information about the client is passed on to the remote server in HTTP Request Headers Standard The following headers are blocked Accept Encoding From Referrer Server WWW Authenticate and Link None Client headers are not changed at all Paranoid All headers except those listed below are blocked Additionally the User Agent field will be changed so that no information about the internal client is available Allow Authorization Cache Control Content Encoding Content Length Content Type Date Expires Host If Modified Since Last Modified Location Pragma Accept Accept Language Content Language Mime Version Retry After Title Connection Proxy Connection and User Agent 225 Using the Security System Note In Standard and Paranoid modes the proxy blocks all cookies 1 If you wish to use cookies you should use the none mode 246 Use the Allowed networks selection menu to select which networks should be allowed to use the proxy A description of how to use the selection field tool can be found in chapter on page 31 All settings take ef
320. u to filter the networks of a specific type Address Values If you wish to filter networks by specific addresses enter the IP address in this entry field 111 Using the Security System 114 To start the filter click on the Apply Filters button Only the filtered networks will be displayed in the table Next time when you open the menu the complete network table will be displayed Further Functions Editing Definitions Click on the settings in the Name Value and Comment columns in order to open an editing window You can then edit the entries Deleting Definitions Clicking on the symbol of the trash will delete the definition from the table 112 Using the Security System 4 2 2 Services SSS The Services menu is used to define the Services and Service Groups Services define certain types of traffic over net works like the Internet A service is defined by a name a protocol and ports The following protocols can be used TCP UDP TCP UDP ICMP ESP AH and IP UDP uses port numbers between 0 and 65535 inclusive and is a stateless protocol that uses no so called ACK Bit Because it does not keep state UDP can be faster than TCP especially when sending small amounts of data This statelessness however also means that UDP cannot recognize when packets are lost or dropped The receiving computer does not signal the sender when it receives packets successfully TCP connections also use port numbers
321. uid This is different in the HTTPS protocol in this case the squid does not read the header of the request but per forms a pass through Therefore the requested URL is unknown and cannot be filtered again This means that the Surf Protection option cannot block URLs on the basis of White or Blacklists for HTTPS connections Content Removal In the access control list enter those expres sions that should be deleted from the Web pages 256 Make the settings for the Content Filter functional group Embedded Object Filter Clicking on the symbol enables C2 and disables GaP the filter Security Note Enable the Embedded Object Filter function only if high security demands apply to your network Script Content Filter Clicking on the symbol enables and disables the function Security Note Enable the Script Content Filter function only if high security demands apply to your network Virus Protection Clicking on the symbol enables and disables the function The Surf Protection Profile is now edited Now assign the profile in the Profile Assignment table to a Network or to a Local User 236 Using the Security System The Profile Assignment Table The Surf Protection Profiles from the Profiles table are assigned to Local Users or Networks in the Profile Assignment table To assign a Surf Protection Profile to a local user the HTTP proxy must be used in the User Authentication Mode The assignment of
322. up later in the System High Availability menu For the monitoring via Heart Beat request reserve a network card that supports this function Now successively connect your client to the network cards of the security system and execute the ping order With the help of the corresponding IP address you can then assign the respective Sys ID Please see page 138 for a description of how to execute a ping command Then shut down both security systems and connect the hardware components as shown in the graphic on page 98 101 Using the Security System 28 Configuring System 1 Normal Mode In the System tab open the High Availability menu Click the Enable button next to Status to enable the option Device Name Enter a descriptive name for the device here This name allows you to know which of both systems is running in normal mode This device name can be up to 11 characters long Encryption Key Enter the password in this entry field Security Note Use a secure password Your name spelled backwards is for example not a secure password while something like xfT35 4 would be Network Interface Card Select a network card to be used for the data transfer connection example eth2 You can only select those network cards that have not been configured before in the Network Interfaces menu The network cards must have the same Sys ID e g eth 2 on both systems If you wish to use Heart Beat monitoring use this menu to choose ne
323. urf Protection Categories is described on page 230 233 Using the Security System Embedded Object Filter This function deletes embedded objects such as ActiveX Flash or Java from the incoming HTTP traffic Security Note Enable the Embedded Object Filter function only if high security demands apply to your network Clicking on the symbol enables 24 and disables GaP the Em bedded Object Filter Script Content Filter This function deletes script contents such as Java and VBScript from incoming HTTP traffic ry Security Note Enable the Script Content Filter function only if high security demands apply to your network Clicking on the symbol enables and disables the Script Content Filter Content Removal This is an additional function of the Surf Pro tection Categories This access control list allows you to filter Web pages that contain specific expressions Such texts which contain an expression from the access control list will be replaced by a HTML comment Open the access control list by clicking on the field with the entry e g O entries Enter the expressions one beneath the other Comments must be identified with a sign at the beginning of each line Save your changes by clicking on the Save button To keep an entry click cancel Virus Protection This functions checks incoming traffic for danger ous content such as viruses Clicking on the symbol enables B and disables the Virus
324. vailable the system will automatically query the next system or pattern Up2Dates in the list In order to download updates the Up2Date Service makes a TCP Important Note connection to the update server on port 443 The security system will permit this connection without any adjustment If there is another security system in place upstream you must allow the communi cation via the port 443 TCP to the update servers Note When using the High Availability HA system please note the m special functions of System Up2Date 48 Using the Security System System Up2Date The System Up2Date function allows you to import system patches and new security features into your Internet security system The Up2Date packages can be downloaded either manually over an en crypted connection or automatically from the Update Server If you don t have an Internet connection you can also import Up2Date packages from a local volume Newly imported Up2Date packages are presented with their respective version number and file name in the Unapplied Up2Dates table These Up2Date packages have not been installed yet In order to get further information touch the blue info button with the cursor If the info button is highlighted red there will be an automatic restart of the Security system after the installation of the System Up2Date package Note If you are using the High Availability HA system please note the special notes for the impo
325. ver networks without encryption and are subjected to a specific expiration period This makes a Brute Force attack against encrypted data almost impossible Configuring Active Directory NT Domain Membership 1In the System tab open the User Authentication menu 70 In the Active Directory NT Domain Membership NT 2000 XP Server Settings window click the Enable button next to Status Enabling the NTLM Domain Membership in the Status line does not unregister the security system from the domain This must be done on the domain controller Domain Member Status Shows Joined domain Domain Name when join was successful 75 Using the Security System Domain Enter the name of your MS Windows NT 2000 Domain Allowed characters are Letters of the alphabet hyphen and underscore characters _ Note This is not the Internet domain as in Company com but rather z simple designator e g Intranet NetBIOS Hostname Enter the NetBIOS hostname the security system should have in the domain You can just invent a name It does not have any additional significance However to avoid inconsistencies please choose a name that is not already used in your domain Please make sure not to use hostnames that are used by other systems and especially not the hostname of the domain con troller it could demote the Domain Controller to a Member Server Attention Account Enter the account name that is allowed t
326. while entering the network Important Note Default Gateway You should probably keep the default setting Assigned by remote Other possible values are Static and None Modem IP Address Enter the IP address of your ADSL modem here This address will usually be provided by your ISP or the 156 Using the Security System modem hardware and cannot be changed Example 10 0 0 138 with AonSpeed NIC IP Address Enter the IP address of the network card on the security system which is attached to the modem here This address must be in the same subnet as the modem Example 10 0 0 140 with AonSpeed NIC Netmask Enter the network mask to use here Example 255 255 255 0 with AonSpeed Address to Ping In order to test the connection between the security system and the external network you can enter an IP address of a host on the Internet e g the DNS server of your ISP here The security system will send ping requests to this host if no answer is received the connection will be broken Username Enter the username provided by your ISP Password Enter the password provided by your ISP Uplink Failover on Interface This function will only be displayed if the Assigned by remote or Static is selected in the Default Gateway drop down menu You can setup a failover on an interface to the Internet with the help of a second Internet access and an additional network card Please remember in doing so that the Internet security
327. wnload of System Up2Date Packages failed If the problem continues please contact the support department of your firewall provider 305 306 320 322 323 324 325 Using the Security System System Up2Date Wrong MD5sum for local System Up2Date package Please download a new Up2Date package If the problem recurs please contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Wrong MD5sum for down loaded Up2Date Package Please download a new Up2Date package If the problem recurs please contact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Wrong start parameters If the problem recurs please contact the sup port department of your firewall provider System Up2date stopped Next Up2Date install lation locked by HA System Up2Date failed Corrupt Up2Date Package Found corrupt Up2Date package Please start pro cess again If the problem recurs please con tact the support department of your firewall provider System Up2Date failed Invalid License Your license is no longer valid System Up2Date failed License check failed Your license could not be checked If the problem continues please contact the support department of your firewall provider 333 System Up2Date failed Internal error The system updat failed Pleas contact the support department of your firewall provider 353 Using the Security System 334 339 336
328. y generated these certificates in the IPSec VPN CA Management menu Chapter on page 309 describes the process of generating X 509 certificates Local Certificate Select here the certificate for the X 509 authenti cation This menu only contains those certificates for which the associ ated private key is available Passphrase In the entry field enter the password used to secure the private key The Active Key will appear with its name in the Local IPSec X 509 Key window If you choose a new ocal key the old key will auto matically be replaced The security system will use the ID and public private key pair of the current Local X 509 Key to identify authenticate and encrypt X 509 IPSec key exchanges 301 Using the Security System RSA Authentication For the authentication via RSA each side of the connection requires a key pair consisting of a Public Key and a Private Key The key pair is created in two steps in the Local IPSec RSA Key window First the Local IPSec Identifier is defined and then the key pair generated 1In the Local IPSec RSA Key window define a unique VPN Identifier IPv4 Address For static IP addresses Hostname For VPN security gateways with dynamic addresses E Mail Address For mobile road warrior connections Save the settings by clicking Save 299 Generate a new RSA Key by selecting the key length from the RSA Key Length drop down menu Important Note r key length must be identical on b
329. yed next to the archived log files Filters 338 Using the Security System The Filters function allows you to filter Log Files with specific attributes from the table This function enhances the management of huge networks as log files of a specific type can be presented in a concise form Filtering Log files 1Click on the Filters button The entry window will open 325 Enter the filter attributes in the fields Not all attributes have to be defined Group If you wish to filter the log files of a specific group select it from the drop down menu Month This drop down menu allows you to filter log files by a given month Type This drop down menu allows you to filter log files by a specific type 326 To start the filter click on the Apply Filters button Only the filtered log files will be displayed in the table Next time when you open the menu the complete log file table will be displayed 339 Using the Security System 4 10 3 1 Log Files This chapter contains all available logs These log files will only be displayed in the Browse menu if the correspondent processes have been recorded by the System The following Accounting data log file for example will only be displayed once the Accounting func tion has been enabled in the Network Accounting menu Accounting data These log files contain all Accounting logs archived by the system The Reporting Accounting menu allows you to view the current logs Configurati
330. you are logged off the session and have to log in again under the WebAdmin configuration tool Using the Security System 4 Using the Security System SE Security Manager poet by nurs Sesera senes A We have already seen the web based configur ation tool WebAdmin in action during the instal lation process This chapter will describe how to use WebAdmin to control and monitor your security system on a day to day basis The specific settings what they do and how to change them will be described step by step Please look to chapter for a more general description of how to use the tools provided by the WebAdmin interface Please remember that the goal in configuring a security system like this should be to enable only the features necessary for correct functionality In general you should restrict in and outbound con nections to those explicitly required Tip Draw up a plan of your network and determine which computer is to have access to which services before configuring the security system This will simplify the configuration process and save you a lot of time Configure the system as follows 1Define all the required networks and hosts 4 Define the necessary services 5 Define the system rules and proxies Starting WebAdmin 37 Using the Security System 1Start your browser and enter the address of the Security system i e the address of the ethO interface as follows htt

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Panasonic RP-HC200-G headphone  6 - Datatail    FREEline SP2  Durst Rho 700 User's Manual  Operating Instructions  Personal Audio Docking System    IST 04 C 436 - 01 DELFIS Bitermica  GE AGF18DA Air Conditioner  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file